EP2120575A1 - Sphingosine-1 -phosphate receptor agonist and antagonist compounds - Google Patents

Sphingosine-1 -phosphate receptor agonist and antagonist compounds

Info

Publication number
EP2120575A1
EP2120575A1 EP07863237A EP07863237A EP2120575A1 EP 2120575 A1 EP2120575 A1 EP 2120575A1 EP 07863237 A EP07863237 A EP 07863237A EP 07863237 A EP07863237 A EP 07863237A EP 2120575 A1 EP2120575 A1 EP 2120575A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
alkyl
substituted
optionally substituted
aryl
alkoxy
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Withdrawn
Application number
EP07863237A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Other versions
EP2120575A4 (en
Inventor
Grier A. Wallace
Eric C. Breinlinger
Kevin P. Cusack
Shannon R. Fix-Stenzel
Thomas D. Gordon
Adrian D. Hobson
Martin E. Hayes
Graham K. Ansell
Pintipa Grongsaard
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Abbott Laboratories
Original Assignee
Abbott Laboratories
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=39562856&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=EP2120575(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Abbott Laboratories filed Critical Abbott Laboratories
Publication of EP2120575A1 publication Critical patent/EP2120575A1/en
Publication of EP2120575A4 publication Critical patent/EP2120575A4/en
Withdrawn legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D231/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings
    • C07D231/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D231/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member
    • C07D231/08—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member with oxygen or sulfur atoms directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/415—1,2-Diazoles
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06—Antipsoriatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C215/00—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C215/02—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having hydroxy groups and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C215/22—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having hydroxy groups and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being unsaturated
    • C07C215/28—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having hydroxy groups and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being unsaturated and containing six-membered aromatic rings
    • C07C215/38—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having hydroxy groups and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being unsaturated and containing six-membered aromatic rings with rings other than six-membered aromatic rings being part of the carbon skeleton
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C215/00—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C215/42—Compounds containing amino and hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino groups or hydroxy groups bound to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C217/00—Compounds containing amino and etherified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C217/52—Compounds containing amino and etherified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having etherified hydroxy groups or amino groups bound to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C217/00—Compounds containing amino and etherified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C217/54—Compounds containing amino and etherified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having etherified hydroxy groups bound to carbon atoms of at least one six-membered aromatic ring and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C217/74—Compounds containing amino and etherified hydroxy groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having etherified hydroxy groups bound to carbon atoms of at least one six-membered aromatic ring and amino groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton with rings other than six-membered aromatic rings being part of the carbon skeleton
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C229/00—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/02—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/04—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated
    • C07C229/06—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having only one amino and one carboxyl group bound to the carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/10—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having only one amino and one carboxyl group bound to the carbon skeleton the nitrogen atom of the amino group being further bound to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings
    • C07C229/14—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms of the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having only one amino and one carboxyl group bound to the carbon skeleton the nitrogen atom of the amino group being further bound to acyclic carbon atoms or to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings to carbon atoms of carbon skeletons containing rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C229/00—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/46—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino or carboxyl groups bound to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/48—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino or carboxyl groups bound to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton with amino groups and carboxyl groups bound to carbon atoms of the same non-condensed ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D205/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing four-membered rings with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D205/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing four-membered rings with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
    • C07D205/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing four-membered rings with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D207/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D207/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D207/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D207/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D207/12—Oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D207/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D207/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D207/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D207/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D207/14—Nitrogen atoms not forming part of a nitro radical
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/28—Radicals substituted by singly-bound oxygen or sulphur atoms
    • C07D213/30—Oxygen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D261/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,2-oxazole rings
    • C07D261/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,2-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D263/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings
    • C07D263/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D263/30—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D263/32—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D263/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings
    • C07D263/52—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D271/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms and one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D271/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms and one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atoms not condensed with other rings
    • C07D271/06—1,2,4-Oxadiazoles; Hydrogenated 1,2,4-oxadiazoles
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D275/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,2-thiazole rings
    • C07D275/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,2-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D307/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D307/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
    • C07D307/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D307/18—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D307/22—Nitrogen atoms not forming part of a nitro radical
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D307/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D307/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
    • C07D307/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D307/18—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D307/24—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D333/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D333/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
    • C07D333/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings not substituted on the ring sulphur atom
    • C07D333/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings not substituted on the ring sulphur atom with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to the ring carbon atoms
    • C07D333/14—Radicals substituted by singly bound hetero atoms other than halogen
    • C07D333/16—Radicals substituted by singly bound hetero atoms other than halogen by oxygen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D491/10—Spiro-condensed systems
    • C07D491/107—Spiro-condensed systems with only one oxygen atom as ring hetero atom in the oxygen-containing ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/06—Phosphorus compounds without P—C bonds
    • C07F9/08—Esters of oxyacids of phosphorus
    • C07F9/09—Esters of phosphoric acids
    • C07F9/091—Esters of phosphoric acids with hydroxyalkyl compounds with further substituents on alkyl
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/28—Phosphorus compounds with one or more P—C bonds
    • C07F9/30—Phosphinic acids R2P(=O)(OH); Thiophosphinic acids, i.e. R2P(=X)(XH) (X = S, Se)
    • C07F9/301—Acyclic saturated acids which can have further substituents on alkyl
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/28—Phosphorus compounds with one or more P—C bonds
    • C07F9/38—Phosphonic acids RP(=O)(OH)2; Thiophosphonic acids, i.e. RP(=X)(XH)2 (X = S, Se)
    • C07F9/3804—Phosphonic acids RP(=O)(OH)2; Thiophosphonic acids, i.e. RP(=X)(XH)2 (X = S, Se) not used, see subgroups
    • C07F9/3808—Acyclic saturated acids which can have further substituents on alkyl
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/28—Phosphorus compounds with one or more P—C bonds
    • C07F9/38—Phosphonic acids RP(=O)(OH)2; Thiophosphonic acids, i.e. RP(=X)(XH)2 (X = S, Se)
    • C07F9/3804—Phosphonic acids RP(=O)(OH)2; Thiophosphonic acids, i.e. RP(=X)(XH)2 (X = S, Se) not used, see subgroups
    • C07F9/3826—Acyclic unsaturated acids
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/28—Phosphorus compounds with one or more P—C bonds
    • C07F9/38—Phosphonic acids RP(=O)(OH)2; Thiophosphonic acids, i.e. RP(=X)(XH)2 (X = S, Se)
    • C07F9/40—Esters thereof
    • C07F9/4003—Esters thereof the acid moiety containing a substituent or a structure which is considered as characteristic
    • C07F9/4006—Esters of acyclic acids which can have further substituents on alkyl
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/6527—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/653—Five-membered rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/655—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/65515—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having oxygen atoms, with or without sulfur, selenium, or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms the oxygen atom being part of a five-membered ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F9/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 5 or 15 of the Periodic System
    • C07F9/02—Phosphorus compounds
    • C07F9/547—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom
    • C07F9/6553—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having sulfur atoms, with or without selenium or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07F9/655345—Heterocyclic compounds, e.g. containing phosphorus as a ring hetero atom having sulfur atoms, with or without selenium or tellurium atoms, as the only ring hetero atoms the sulfur atom being part of a five-membered ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C2601/00—Systems containing only non-condensed rings
    • C07C2601/02—Systems containing only non-condensed rings with a three-membered ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C2601/00—Systems containing only non-condensed rings
    • C07C2601/06—Systems containing only non-condensed rings with a five-membered ring
    • C07C2601/08—Systems containing only non-condensed rings with a five-membered ring the ring being saturated

Definitions

  • Sphingosine-1 -phosphate is part of the sphingomyelin biosynthetic pathway and is known to affect multiple biological processes. SlP is formed through phosphorylation of sphingosine by sphingosine kinases (SKl and SK2) and it is degraded through cleavage by sphingosine lyase to form palmitaldehyde and phosphoethanolamine or through dephosphorylation by phospholipid phosphatases. It is present at high levels ( ⁇ 500 nM) in serum, and it is found in most tissues.
  • GPCR G protein-coupled receptor
  • SlP evokes many responses from cells and tissues.
  • SlP has been shown to be an agonist at all five GPCRs, SlP 1 (Edg-1), SlP 2 (Edg-5), SlP 3 (Edg-3), SlP 4 (Edg-6) and SlP 5 (Edg-8).
  • the action of SlP at the SlP receptors has been linked to resistance to apoptosis, changes in cellular morphology, cell migration, growth, differentiation, cell division, angiogenesis and modulation of the immune system via alterations of lymphocyte trafficking. Therefore, SlP receptors are targets for therapy of, for example, neoplastic diseases, autoimmune disorders and tissue rejection in transplantation.
  • GPCRs are excellent drug targets with numerous examples of marketed drugs across multiple disease areas.
  • GPCRs are cell surface receptors that bind hormones on the extracellular surface of the cell and transduce a signal across the cellular membrane to the inside of the cell. The internal signal is amplified through interaction with G proteins which in turn interact with various second messenger pathways. This transduction pathway is manifested in downstream cellular responses that include cytoskeletal changes, cell motility, proliferation, apoptosis, secretion and regulation of protein expression, to name a few.
  • SIP receptors make good drug targets because individual receptors are expressed in different tissues and signal through different pathways, making the individual receptors both tissue and response specific. Tissue specificity of the SIP receptors is desirable because development of an agonist or antagonist selective for one receptor localizes the cellular response to tissues containing that receptor, limiting unwanted side effects. Response specificity of the SIP receptors is also of importance because it allows for the development of agonists or antagonists that initiate or suppress certain cellular responses without affecting other responses. For example, the response specificity of the SIP receptors could allow for an SlP mimetic that initiates platelet aggregation without affecting cell morphology.
  • SIP receptors The physiologic implications of stimulating individual SIP receptors are largely unknown due in part to a lack of receptor type selective ligands. Isolation and characterization of SIP analogs that have potent agonist or antagonist activity for SlP receptors have been limited.
  • SlP for example is widely expressed, and the knockout causes embryonic lethality due to large vessel rupture.
  • Adoptive cell transfer experiments using lymphocytes from SDPi knockout mice have shown that SlPj deficient lymphocytes sequester to secondary lymph organs.
  • the present invention provides compounds of Formula I
  • D is H, N(R 5 ) 2 or OR 6 ;
  • X is CH, C(CH 3 ) or N;
  • Y is CH 2 , O, S or NR 3 ; wherein R 3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (C r Ci 0 ) alkyl;
  • X is CH or N
  • A is H, -C(O)-OCH 3 , -C(O)-NR 6 , CN, C(O)-NHCH 3 , COOR 6 , -R 4 -C00H, or optionally substituted azetidinyl, wherein R 4 is straight or branched (C r C 2 o) alkylene, straight or branched (C 1 -C 20 ) alkenylene, straight or branched (C 1 -C 20 ) alkynylene;
  • X is CH
  • Y is CH 2 or O;
  • A is -C(O)-OCH 3 , -COOH, -R 4 -C00H, -C(O)-NHCH 3 , or optionally substituted azetidinyl;
  • R 4 is straight or branched (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkenylene, or straight or branched (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkynylene;
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkyl, (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkoxy, (C 3 -Ci 0 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C 3 -Ci 0 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy,
  • X is CH; Y is CH 2 ;
  • A is COOH
  • R 1 is (Ci-C 10 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 10 )alkenyl or (C 2 -C 10 )alkynyl; R 2 is H; and m is 1.
  • Y is CH 2 , O, S or NR 3 ; wherein R 3 is hydrogen, or (CrCi 0 ) alkyl;
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, straight or branched (C 1 -C 10 ) alkyl, (C r Ci 0 ) alkoxy, (C 3 -Ci 0 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C 2 -C 10 ) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -C 10 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -Ci 0 ) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -C 10 ) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted (C r C 10 )alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, (C 1 -C 10 )alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, aryl substitute
  • R 6 is independently selected from H or optionally substituted (C r C 2 )alkyl
  • X is CH or N
  • Y is CH 2 , O, S or NR 3 ; wherein R 3 is hydrogen, or (C 1 -C 20 ) alkyl;
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (C r C 20 ) alkyl, (Ci-C 20 ) alkoxy, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 20 ) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -C 20 ) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl and aryl substituted arylalkyl; wherein such R 2 groups may be optionally substituted with (C r C 20 ) alkyl, halo, hydroxy,
  • Y is CH 2 ;
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, straight or branched (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkyl, aryl substituted (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, (Ci-Cio)alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R 1 and R 2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkyl, halo and (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkoxy; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R 1 or R 2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen; wherein one of R 1 and R 2 is other than hydrogen; and
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted (C r Ci 0 ) alkyl; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R 1 or R 2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen; wherein one of R 1 and R 2 is other than hydrogen;; m is 1; and u is l.
  • the invention provides compounds of embodiments one, seven, eight, nine and ten wherein the compound is
  • D is H, N(R 5 ) 2 , or OR 6 ;
  • X is CH, C(CH 3 ) or N;
  • Y is CH 2 , O, S or NR 3 ; wherein R 3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (Ci-Cio) alkyl;
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF 3 , halo, (Ci- C 20 ) alkyl, (Ci-C 20 ) alkoxy, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 2 o) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C 2 - C 20 ) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizin
  • X is CH, C(CH 3 ) or N
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF 3 , halo, (C 1 - C 20 ) alkyl, (C 1 -C 20 ) alkoxy, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 20 ) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -
  • R 1 and R 2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-C 20 ) alkyl, CF 3 , halo, hydroxy, (Ci-C 20 ) alkoxy, OCF 3 , and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R 1 or R 2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR 8 ; wherein R 8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C 20 ) alkyl group; wherein one of R 1 and R 2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the al
  • the invention provides a method of claim 14 wherein the disorder is rheumatoid arthritis, lupus, Crohn's disease, asthma, diabetes, pain or psoriasis.
  • D is H, N(R 5 ) 2 , or OR 6 ;
  • X is CH, C(CH 3 ) or N;
  • Y is CH 2 , O, S or NR 3 ; wherein R 3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkyl;
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF 3 , halo, (Q- C 20 ) alkyl, (C, -C 20 ) alkoxy, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 20 ) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C 2 - C 20 ) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indoliziny
  • the invention provides a method of treating multiple sclerosis comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of any of the foregoing embodiments or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof.
  • D is H, N(R 5 ) 2 , or OR 6 ;
  • X is CH, C(CH 3 ) or N
  • Y is CH 2 , O, S or NR 3 ; wherein R 3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (Ci-Ci 0 ) alkyl; A is H, hydroxy, -CH 2 OH, -CH(OH)CH 3 , -C(O)-OCH 3 , -C(OH)(CH 3 ) 2 , -0(CH 2 ) t -C00H,-
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF 3 , halo, (C r C 20 ) alkyl, (C]-C 20 ) alkoxy, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C 2 -C 2 o) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 2O ) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C 2 - C 20 ) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indoli
  • the invention provides the packaged pharmaceutical according to embodiment eighteen wherein the compound or compounds are present in a therapeutically effective amount.
  • the invention provides a compound of Formula 2
  • the invention provides a compound of Formula 5
  • the invention provides a compound of Formula 10
  • the invention provides a compound of Formula 12
  • R 1 or R 2 are independently fluorine or chlorine or fluoro- or chloro- substituted alkyl.
  • Z is hydroxy or -OPO 3 H 2 .
  • R 1 is hydrogen and R 2 is alkyl, akenyl, or alkynyl having 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 carbon atoms.
  • R 1 is hydrogen and R 2 is heptyl, octyl, nonyl, -O-heptyl,
  • R 1 is hydrogen and R 2 is -(CH 2 ) n -OCH 3 , -(CH 2 ) n -OCF 3 , -O-(CH 2 ) n -OCH 3 , or -O-(CH 2 ) n -OCF 3 , where n is an integer from 1-20, preferably 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising one or more compounds according to Formula I, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, hydrates, metabolites, prodrugs or stereoisomers thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier.
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition wherein the compound or compounds are present in a therapeutically effective amount.
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition wherein the compound or compounds are present in a prophylactically effective amount.
  • the invention provides a packaged pharmaceutical comprising one or more compounds according to Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, hydrates, metabolites, prodrugs or stereoisomers thereof and instructions for use.
  • the invention provides a packaged pharmaceutical wherein the compound or compounds are present in a therapeutically effective amount.
  • the invention provides a packaged pharmaceutical wherein the compound or compounds are present in a prophylactically effective amount.
  • the present invention provides novel compounds of Formula I:
  • X is CH or N
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (Ci-C 20 ) alkyl, (C 1 -C 20 ) alkyl substituted with halo, hydroxy, (Ci-C 20 ) alkoxy, or CN; and
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (C r C 20 ) alkyl, (Ci-C 20 ) alkoxy, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C 3 -C 20 ) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -C 20 ) alkenyl, (C 2 -C 20 ) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C 2 -C 20 ) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl and aryl substituted arylalkyl; wherein such R 2 groups may be optionally substituted with (Ci-C 20 ) alkyl, halo, hydroxy, (C r
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” is an amount of a compound of Formula I or a combination of two or more such compounds, which inhibits, totally or partially, the progression of the condition or alleviates, at least partially, one or more symptoms of the condition.
  • a therapeutically effective amount can also be an amount which is prophylactically effective. The amount which is therapeutically effective will depend upon the patient's size and gender, the condition to be treated, the severity of the condition and the result sought. For a given patient, a therapeutically effective amount can be determined by methods known to those of skill in the art.
  • Physiologically acceptable salts or “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers to those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the free bases and which are obtained by reaction with inorganic acids, for example, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, and phosphoric acid or organic acids such as sulfonic acid, carboxylic acid, organic phosphoric acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, citric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, L-aspartic acid, L-mandelic, L-succinic acid, benzoic acid, salicylic acid, lactic acid, tartaric acid (e.g. (+) or (-)-tartaric acid or mixtures thereof), amino acids (e.g. (+) or (-)-amino acids or mixtures thereof), and the like.
  • These salts can be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • Certain compounds of Formula I which have acidic substituents may exist as salts with pharmaceutically acceptable bases.
  • the present invention includes such salts.
  • Examples of such salts include sodium salts, potassium salts, lysine salts and arginine salts. These salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • Certain compounds of Formula I and their salts may exist in more than one crystal form and the present invention includes each crystal form and mixtures thereof.
  • Certain compounds of Formula I and their salts may also exist in the form of solvates, for example hydrates, and the present invention includes each solvate and mixtures thereof.
  • Certain compounds of Formula I may contain one or more chiral centers, and exist in different optically active forms. When compounds of Formula I contain one chiral center, the compounds exist in two enantiomeric forms and the present invention includes both enantiomers and mixtures of enantiomers, such as racemic mixtures.
  • the enantiomers may be resolved by methods known to those skilled in the art, for example by formation of diastereoisomeric salts which may be separated, for example, by crystallization; formation of diastereoisomeric derivatives or complexes which may be separated, for example, by crystallization, gas-liquid or liquid chromatography; selective reaction of one enantiomer with an enantiomer-specific reagent, for example enzymatic esterification; or gas-liquid or liquid chromatography in a chiral environment, for example on a chiral support for example silica with a bound chiral ligand or in the presence of a chiral solvent.
  • a further step may be used to liberate the desired enantiomeric form.
  • specific enantiomers may be synthesized by asymmetric synthesis using optically active reagents, substrates, catalysts or solvents, or by converting one enantiomer into the other by asymmetric transformation.
  • a compound of Formula I contains more than one chiral center, it may exist in diastereoisomeric forms.
  • the diastereoisomeric compounds may be separated by methods known to those skilled in the art, for example chromatography or crystallization and the individual stereoismers may be separated as described above.
  • the present invention includes each diastereoisomer of compounds of Formula I and mixtures thereof.
  • Certain compounds of Formula I may exist in different tautomeric forms or as different geometric isomers, and the present invention includes each tautomer and/or geometric isomer of compounds of Formula I and mixtures thereof.
  • Certain compounds of Formula I may exist in different stable conformational forms which may be separable. Torsional asymmetry due to restricted rotation about an asymmetric single bond, for example because of steric hindrance or ring strain, may permit separation of different conformers.
  • the present invention includes each conformational isomer of compounds of Formula I and mixtures thereof.
  • Certain compounds of Formula I may exist in zwitterionic form and the present invention includes each zwitterionic form of compounds of Formula I and mixtures thereof.
  • pro-drug refers to an agent which is converted into the parent drug in vivo by some physiological chemical process (e.g., a prodrug on being brought to the physiological pH is converted to the desired drug form).
  • Pro-drugs are often useful because, in some situations, they may be easier to administer than the active metabolite. They may, for instance, be bioavailable by oral administration whereas the parent drug is not.
  • the prodrug may also have improved solubility in pharmacological compositions over the active metabolite.
  • pro-drug a compound of the present invention wherein it is administered as an ester (the "pro-drug") to facilitate transmittal across a cell membrane where water solubility is not beneficial, but then it is metabolically hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid once inside the cell where water solubility is beneficial
  • Pro-drugs have many useful properties. For example, a pro-drug may be more water soluble than the ultimate drug, thereby facilitating oral administration of the drug. A pro-drug may also have a higher level of oral bioavailability than the ultimate drug. After administration, the prodrug is enzymatically or chemically cleaved to deliver the ultimate drug in the blood or tissue.
  • Exemplary pro-drugs upon cleavage release the corresponding free acid, and such hydrolyzable ester-forming residues of the compounds of this invention include but are not limited to carboxylic acid substituents (e.g., -(CH 2 )C(O)OH or a moiety that contains a carboxylic acid) wherein the free hydrogen is replaced by (Ci-C 4 ) alkyl, (C 2 -Ci 2 ) alkanoyloxymethyl, (C 4 -C 9 ) 1- (alkanoyloxy)ethyl, l-methyl-l-(alkanoyloxy)-ethyl having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms, l-(alkoxycarbonyloxy)ethyl having from 4 to 7 carbon atoms, 1 -methyl- l-(alkoxycarbonyloxy)ethyl having from 5 to 8 carbon atoms, N-(alkoxycarbon
  • exemplary pro-drugs release an alcohol of Formula I wherein the free hydrogen of the hydroxy substituent (e.g., Z contains hydroxy) is replaced by phosphate (PO 4 ), (Ci- C 6 )alkanoyloxymethyl, l-((C r C 6 )alkanoyloxy)ethyl, l-methyl-l-((Ci-C 6 )alkanoyloxy)ethyl, (C r C 6 )alkoxycarbonyloxy-methyl, N-(Ci-C 6 )alkoxycarbonylamino-methyl, succinoyl, (Ci-C 6 )alkanoyl, ⁇ -amino(Ci-C 4 )alkanoyl, arylacyl and ⁇ -aminoacyl, or ⁇ -aminoacyl- ⁇ -aminoacyl wherein said ⁇ - aminoacyl moieties are independently any of the naturally occurring L-amino acids found in proteins, -
  • heterocyclic or “heterocyclyl”, as used herein, include non-aromatic ring systems, including, but not limited to, monocyclic, bicyclic and tricyclic rings, which can be completely saturated or which can contain one or more units of unsaturation (for the avoidance of doubt, the degree of unsaturation does not result in an aromatic ring system) and have 3 to 12 atoms including at least one heteroatom, such as nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • heteroaryl as used herein, include aromatic ring systems, including, but not limited to, monocyclic, bicyclic and tricyclic rings, and have 3 to 12 atoms including at least one heteroatom, such as nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • azaindole benzo(b)thienyl, benzimidazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, furans, imidazoles, imidazopyridine, indole, indolinyl, indazoles, isoindolinyl, isoxazoles, isothiazoles, oxadiazoles, oxazoles, purine, pyrans, pyrazines, pyrazoles, pyridines, pyrimidines, pyrroles, pyrrolo[2,3- djpyrimidine, pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidine), quinolines, quinazolines, triazoles, thiazoles, thiophenyl, tetrahydroindole, tetrazol
  • substituted heterocyclic or heterocyclyl or “substituted heteroaryl”
  • substituted heterocyclic or heterocyclyl or “substituted heteroaryl”
  • the heterocyclic group is substituted with one or more substituents that can be made by one of ordinary skill in the art and results in a molecule that is an agonist or antagonist of the sphingosine receptor family.
  • preferred substituents for the heterocycle of this invention are each independently selected from the optionally substituted group consisting of alkenyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylheterocycloalkoxy, alkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkylester, alkyl-O-C(O)-, alkyl-heterocyclyl, alkyl-cycloalkyl, alkyl-nitrile, alkynyl, amido groups, amino, aminoalkyl, aminocarbonyl, carbonitrile, carbonylalkoxy, carboxamido, -CF 3 , -CN, -C(O)OH, -C(O)H, -C(O)-C(CH 3 ) 3 , -OH, -C(O)O-alkyl, -C(O)O
  • Z 105 for each occurrence is independently a covalent bond, alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl; and Z 200 for each occurrence is independently selected from an optionally substituted group selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, phenyl, alkyl-phenyl, alkenyl-phenyl or alkynyl-phenyl; E is a direct bond, O, S, S(O), S(O) 2 , or NR f , wherein R f is H or alkyl and R 0 and R 6 are independently H, alkyl, alkanoyl or SO 2 -aIkyl; or Ra, R e and the nitrogen atom to which they are attached together to form a five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring.
  • heterocycloalkyl is a heterocyclic group that is linked to a compound by an aliphatic group having from one to eight carbon atoms.
  • a preferred heterocycloalkyl group is a morpholinomethyl group.
  • aliphatic or “an aliphatic group” or notations such as “(Ci-C 20 )” include straight chained or branched hydrocarbons which are completely saturated or which contain one or more units of unsaturation, and, thus, includes alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl and hydrocarbons comprising a mixture of single, double and triple bonds. When the group is a C 0 it means that the moiety is not present or in other words, it is a bond.
  • alkyl means C]-C 20 and includes straight chained or branched hydrocarbons, which are completely saturated.
  • alkyls are methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, etc. up to twenty carbon atoms, and isomers thereof.
  • alkenyl and alkynyl means C 2 -C 20 and includes straight chained or branched hydrocarbons which contain one or more units of unsaturation, one or more double bonds for alkenyl and one or more triple bonds for alkynyl.
  • aromatic groups include aromatic carbocyclic ring systems (e.g., phenyl and cyclopentyldienyl) and fused polycyclic aromatic ring systems (e.g., naphthyl, biphenylenyl and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthyl).
  • cycloalkyl means C 3 -C 2O monocyclic or multicyclic (e.g., bicyclic, tricyclic, etc.) hydrocarbons that is completely saturated or has one or more unsaturated bonds but does not amount to an aromatic group.
  • Preferred examples of a cycloalkyl group are cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl and cyclohexenyl.
  • aryl substituted alkyl or "aryl substituted alkenyl” means moieties such as methylphenyl, ethylphenyl, methylnaphthyl, ethylnapthyl, ethylenylphenyl ethylenylnaphthyl and so on wherein the alkyl portion of the moiety ranges from 1 to 20 carbons and the alkenyl portion of the moiety ranges from 2 to 20 carbons.
  • heteroaryl substituted alkyl means moieties such as methylpyridinyl, ethylpyridinyl and so on wherein the alkyl portion of the moiety ranges from 1 to 20 carbons and the heteroaryl can be any heteroaryl.
  • many moieties or substituents are termed as being either "substituted" or
  • alkenyl groups alkoxy group (which itself can be substituted, such as -0-(Ci- C 6 )alkyl-OR, -O-(Ci-C 6 )alky 1-N(R) 2 , and -OCF 3 ), alkoxyalkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylpiperidinyl-alkoxy, alkyl groups (which itself can also be substituted, such as -Q- C 6 -alkyl-OR, -C 1 -Q-alky 1-N(R) 2 , and -CF 3 ), alkylamino, alkylcarbonyl, alkylester, alkylnitrile, alkylsulfonyl, amino, aminoalkoxy, -CF 3 , -COH, -COOH, -CN, cycloalkyl,
  • the compounds according to the invention may be prepared following synthesis schemes set forth in detail in the Examples below. Methods of Use
  • the present invention provides compounds described by general Formula I which are effective as antagonists or agonists of the G protein-coupled SlP receptor family. These compounds reduce the number of circulating and infiltrating T- and B-lymphocytes, affording a beneficial immunosuppressive effect.
  • the present invention also provides compounds that exhibit activity within the SlP receptor family.
  • the invention provides a method for modulating receptors of the SlP family in a human subject suffering from a disorder in which modulation of SlP activity is beneficial, comprising administering to the human subject a compound of Formula I such that modulation of SlP activity in the human subject is triggered and treatment is achieved.
  • the invention provides a method of modulating sphingosine-1- phosphate receptor 1 (SlPi) activity comprising contacting a cell with one or more compounds of Formula I.
  • a compound of Formula I or a salt thereof or pharmaceutical compositions containing a therapeutically effective amount thereof is useful in the treatment of a disorder selected from the group comprising CNS system disorders, arthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, juvenile chronic arthritis, Lyme arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, reactive arthritis, and septic arthritis, spondyloarthropathy, systemic lupus erythematosus, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, inflammatory bowel disease, insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, thyroiditis, asthma, allergic diseases, psoriasis, dermatitis scleroderma, graft versus host disease, organ transplant rejection (including but not limited to bone marrow and solid organ rejection), acute or chronic immune disease associated with organ transplantation, sarcoidosis, atherosclerosis, disseminated intravascular coagulation, Kawasaki's disease, Grave's disease, nephrotic syndrome, chronic fatigue syndrome, Wegener's granulomatos
  • such compounds may be useful in the treatment of disorders such as, edema, ascites, effusions, and exudates, including for example macular edema, cerebral edema, acute lung injury, adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), proliferative disorders such as restenosis, fibrotic disorders such as hepatic cirrhosis and atherosclerosis, mesangial cell proliferative disorders such as glomerulonephritis, diabetic nephropathy, malignant nephrosclerosis, thrombotic microangiopathy syndromes, and glomerulopathies, myocardial angiogenesis, coronary and cerebral collaterals, ischemic limb angiogenesis, ischemia/reperfusion injury, peptic ulcer Helicobacter related diseases, virally-induced angiogenic disorders, Crow-Fukase syndrome (POEMS), preeclampsia, menometrorrhagia, cat scratch fever, rubeosis, neovascular glaucoma and
  • these compounds can be used as active agents against solid tumors, malignant ascites, von Hippel Lindau disease, hematopoietic cancers and hyperproliferative disorders such as thyroid hyperplasia (especially Grave's disease), and cysts (such as hypervascularity of ovarian stroma characteristic of polycystic ovarian syndrome (Stein-Leventhal syndrome) and polycystic kidney disease since such diseases require a proliferation of blood vessel cells for growth and/or metastasis.
  • thyroid hyperplasia especially Grave's disease
  • cysts such as hypervascularity of ovarian stroma characteristic of polycystic ovarian syndrome (Stein-Leventhal syndrome) and polycystic kidney disease since such diseases require a proliferation of blood vessel cells for growth and/or metastasis.
  • Compounds of Formula I of the invention can be used alone or in combination with another therapeutic agent to treat such diseases.
  • an additional agent e.g., a therapeutic agent
  • the additional agent can be a therapeutic agent art-recognized as being useful to treat the disease or condition being treated by the compound of the present invention.
  • the additional agent also can be an agent that imparts a beneficial attribute to the therapeutic composition e.g., an agent that affects the viscosity of the composition.
  • Preferred combinations are non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug(s) also referred to as NSAIDS which include drugs like ibuprofen.
  • Other preferred combinations are corticosteroids including prednisolone; the well known side-effects of steroid use can be reduced or even eliminated by tapering the steroid dose required when treating patients in combination with the SlP receptor agonists or antagonists of this invention.
  • Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for rheumatoid arthritis with which a compound of Formula I of the invention can be combined include the following: cytokine suppressive anti-inflammatory drug(s) (CSAIDs); antibodies to or antagonists of other human cytokines or growth factors, for example, TNF, LT, IL-I, IL-2, IL-3, IL- 4, IL-5, IL-6, DL-7, IL-8, IL-12, IL-15, IL-16, IL-21, IL-23, interferons, EMAP-II, GM-CSF, FGF, and PDGF.
  • CSAIDs cytokine suppressive anti-inflammatory drug(s)
  • S/T kinase inhibitors of the invention can be combined with antibodies to cell surface molecules such as CD2, CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, CD28, CD30, CD40, CD45, CD69, CD80 (B7.1), CD86 (B7.2), CD90, CTLA or their ligands including CD154 (gp39 or CD40L).
  • cell surface molecules such as CD2, CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, CD28, CD30, CD40, CD45, CD69, CD80 (B7.1), CD86 (B7.2), CD90, CTLA or their ligands including CD154 (gp39 or CD40L).
  • a compound of Formula I of the invention may also be combined with agents, such as methotrexate, 6-MP, azathioprine sulphasalazine, mesalazine, olsalazine chloroquinine/ hydroxychloroquine, pencillamine, aurothiomalate (intramuscular and oral), azathioprine, cochicine, corticosteroids (oral, inhaled and local injection), beta-2 adrenoreceptor agonists (salbutamol, terbutaline, salmeteral), xanthines (theophylline, aminophylline), cromoglycate, nedocromil, ketotifen, ipratropium and oxitropium, cyclosporin, FK506, rapamycin, mycophenolate mofetil, leflunomide, NSADDs, for example, ibuprofen, corticosteroids such as prednisolone, phosphodiesterase
  • IL-l ⁇ converting enzyme inhibitors T-cell signalling inhibitors such as kinase inhibitors, metalloproteinase inhibitors, sulfasalazine, 6-mercaptopurines, angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors, soluble cytokine receptors and derivatives thereof (e.g. soluble p55 or p75 TNF receptors and the derivatives p75TNFRIgG (EnbrelTM and p55TNFRIgG (Lenercept)), sDL-lRI, sIL-lRII, sIL-6R), antiinflammatory cytokines (e.g.
  • IL-4, IL-10, IL-I l, IL-13 and TGF ⁇ celecoxib, folic acid, hydroxychloroquine sulfate, rofecoxib, etanercept, infliximab, naproxen, valdecoxib, sulfasalazine, methylprednisolone, meloxicam, methylprednisolone acetate, gold sodium thiomalate, aspirin, triamcinolone acetonide, propoxyphene napsylate/apap, folate, nabumetone, diclofenac, piroxicam, etodolac, diclofenac sodium, oxaprozin, oxycodone HCl, hydrocodone bitartrate/apap, diclofenac sodium/misoprostol, fentanyl, anakinra, tramadol HCl, salsalate, sulinda
  • Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for inflammatory bowel disease with which a compound of Formula I of the invention can be combined include the following: budenoside; epidermal growth factor; corticosteroids; cyclosporin, sulfasalazine; aminosalicylates; 6- mercaptopurine; azathioprine; metronidazole; lipoxygenase inhibitors; mesalamine; olsalazine; balsalazide; antioxidants; thromboxane inhibitors; IL-I receptor antagonists; anti-EL-l ⁇ monoclonal antibodies; anti-IL-6 monoclonal antibodies; growth factors; elastase inhibitors; pyridinyl-imidazole compounds; antibodies to or antagonists of other human cytokines or growth factors, for example,
  • TNF antagonists for example, anti-TNF antibodies, HUMIRATM ,U.S. Patent No. US 6,090,382;, CA2 (REMICADETM), CDP 571, TNFR-Ig constructs, (p75TNFRIgG (ENBRELTM) and p55TNFRIgG (LenerceptTM)) inhibitors and PDE4 inhibitors.
  • a compound of Formula I can be combined with corticosteroids, for example, budenoside and dexamethasone; sulfasalazine, 5-aminosalicylic acid; olsalazine; and agents which interfere with synthesis or action of proinflammatory cytokines such as EL-I, for example, EL-l ⁇ converting enzyme inhibitors and EL-lra; T cell signaling inhibitors, for example, tyrosine kinase inhibitors 6-mercaptopurines; EL-I l; mesalamine; prednisone; azathioprine; mercaptopurine; infliximab; methylprednisolone sodium succinate; diphenoxylate/atrop sulfate; loperamide hydrochloride; methotrexate; omeprazole; folate; ciprofloxacin/dextrose-water; hydrocodone bitartrate/apap; tetracycline hydrochlor
  • a compound of Formula I can be combined with antibodies to cell surface molecules such as CD2, CD3, CD4, CD8, CD 19, CD20, CD25, CD28, CD30, CD40, CD45, CD69, CD80, CD86, CD90 or their ligands.
  • a compound of Formula I may also be combined with agents such as methotrexate, cyclosporine, FK506, rapamycin, mycophenolate mofetil, leflunomide, NSAIDs, for example, ibuprofen, corticosteroids such as prednisolone, phosphodiesterase inhibitors, adensosine agonists, antithrombotic agents, complement inhibitors, adrenergic agents, agents which interfere with signalling by proinflammatory cytokines such as TNF ⁇ or DL-I (e.g.
  • KAK, NIK, IKK, p38 or MAP kinase inhibitors KAK, NIK, IKK, p38 or MAP kinase inhibitors
  • DL-l ⁇ converting enzyme inhibitors TACE inhibitors
  • T-cell signaling inhibitors such as kinase inhibitors, metalloproteinase inhibitors, sulfasalazine, azathioprine, 6- mercaptopurines, angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors, soluble cytokine receptors and derivatives thereof (e.g., soluble p55 or p75 TNF receptors, sIL-lRI, sIL-lRII, sIL-6R) and antiinflammatory cytokines (e.g. DL-4, DL-IO, IL-13 and TGF ⁇ ).
  • soluble cytokine receptors e.g., soluble p55 or p75 TNF receptors, sIL-lRI, sIL-lRII
  • Preferred examples of therapeutic agents for multiple sclerosis in which a compound of Formula I can be combined to include interferon- ⁇ , for example, EFN ⁇ la and DFN ⁇ lb; Copaxone, corticosteroids, caspase inhibitors, for example inhibitors of caspase-1, EL-I inhibitors, TNF inhibitors, and antibodies to CD40 ligand and CD80.
  • a compound of Formula I may also be combined with agents, such as alemtuzumab, dronabinol, daclizumab, mitoxantrone, xaliproden hydrochloride, fampridine, glatiramer acetate, natalizumab, sinnabidol, a-immunokine NNSO3, ABR-215062, AnergiX.MS, chemokine receptor antagonists, BBR-2778, calagualine, CPI-1189, LEM (liposome encapsulated mitoxantrone), THCCBD (cannabinoid agonist), MBP-8298, mesopram (PDE4 inhibitor), MNA-715, anti-IL-6 receptor antibody, neurovax, pirfenidone allotrap 1258 (RDP-1258), sTNF-Rl, talampanel, teriflunomide, TGF-beta2, tiplimotide, VLA-4 antagonists (for example,
  • I of the invention can be combined include the following: aspirin, nitroglycerin, isosorbide mononitrate, metoprolol succinate, atenolol, metoprolol tartrate, amlodipine besylate, diltiazem hydrochloride, isosorbide dinitrate, clopidogrel bisulfate, nifedipine, atorvastatin calcium, potassium chloride, furosemide, simvastatin, verapamil HCl, digoxin, propranolol hydrochloride, carvedilol, lisinopril, spironolactone, hydrochlorothiazide, enalapril maleate, nadolol, ramipril, enoxaparin sodium, heparin sodium, valsartan, sotalol hydrochloride, fenofibrate, ezetimibe, bumetanide, losartan potassium,
  • I can be combined include the following: albuterol, salmeterol/fluticasone, montelukast sodium, fluticasone propionate, budesonide, prednisone, salmeterol xinafoate, levalbuterol HCl, albuterol sulfate/ipratropium, prednisolone sodium phosphate, triamcinolone acetonide, beclomethasone dipropionate, ipratropium bromide, azithromycin, pirbuterol acetate, prednisolone, theophylline anhydrous, methylprednisolone sodium succinate, clarithromycin, zafirlukast, formoterol fumarate, influenza virus vaccine, amoxicillin trihydrate, flunisolide, allergy injection, cromolyn sodium, fexofenadine hydrochloride, flunisolide/menthol, amoxicillin/clavulanate, levofloxacin
  • I can be combined include the following: albuterol sulfate/ipratropium, ipratropium bromide, salmeterol/fluticasone, albuterol, salmeterol xinafoate, fluticasone propionate, prednisone, theophylline anhydrous, methylprednisolone sodium succinate, montelukast sodium, budesonide, formoterol fumarate, triamcinolone acetonide, levofloxacin, guaifenesin, azithromycin, beclomethasone dipropionate, levalbuterol HCl, flunisolide, ceftriaxone sodium, amoxicillin trihydrate, gatifloxacin, zafirlukast, amoxicillin/clavulanate, flunisolide/menthol, chlorpheniramine/hydrocodone, metaproterenol sulfate, methylprednisolone, mom
  • Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for HCV with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: Interferon- ⁇ -2a, Interferon- ⁇ -2b, Interferon- ⁇ conl, Interferon- ⁇ -nl, pegylated interferon- ⁇ -2a, pegylated interferon- ⁇ -2b, ribavirin, peginterferon alfa- 2b + ribavirin, ursodeoxycholic acid, glycyrrhizic acid, thymalfasin, Maxamine, VX-497 and any compounds that are used to treat HCV through intervention with the following targets: HCV polymerase, HCV protease, HCV helicase, and HCV IRES (internal ribosome entry site).
  • Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for Idiopathic Pulmonary Fibrosis with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: prednisone, azathioprine, albuterol, colchicine, albuterol sulfate, digoxin, gamma interferon, methylprednisolone sod succ, lorazepam, furosemide, lisinopril, nitroglycerin, spironolactone, cyclophosphamide, ipratropium bromide, actinomycin d, alteplase, fluticasone propionate, levofloxacin, metaproterenol sulfate, morphine sulfate, oxycodone HCl, potassium chloride, triamcinolone acetonide, tacrolimus anhydrous, calcium, interferon- ⁇ , methotrexate, mycophenolate mofetil and interferon-gamma-l ⁇ .
  • Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for myocardial infarction with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: aspirin, nitroglycerin, metoprolol tartrate, enoxaparin sodium, heparin sodium, clopidogrel bisulfate, carvedilol, atenolol, morphine sulfate, metoprolol succinate, warfarin sodium, lisinopril, isosorbide mononitrate, digoxin, furosemide, simvastatin, ramipril, tenecteplase, enalapril maleate, torsemide, retavase, losartan potassium, quinapril HCl/mag carb, bumetanide, alteplase, enalaprilat, amiodarone hydrochloride, tirofiban HCl m-hydrate, diltiazem hydrochloride, captopril,
  • Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for psoriasis with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: calcipotriene, clobetasol propionate, triamcinolone acetonide, halobetasol propionate, tazarotene, methotrexate, fluocinonide, betamethasone diprop augmented, fluocinolone acetonide, acitretin, tar shampoo, betamethasone valerate, mometasone furoate, ketoconazole, pramoxine/fluocinolone, hydrocortisone valerate, flurandrenolide, urea, betamethasone, clobetasol propionate/emoll, fluticasone propionate, azithromycin, hydrocortisone, moisturizing formula, folic acid, desonide, pimecrolimus, coal tar, diflorasone diacetate, etanercept folate,
  • Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for psoriatic arthritis with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: methotrexate, etanercept, rofecoxib, celecoxib, folic acid, sulfasalazine, naproxen, leflunomide, methylprednisolone acetate, indomethacin, hydroxychloroquine sulfate, prednisone, sulindac, betamethasone diprop augmented, infliximab, methotrexate, folate, triamcinolone acetonide, diclofenac, dimethylsulfoxide, piroxicam, diclofenac sodium, ketoprofen, meloxicam, methylprednisolone, nabumetone, tolmetin sodium, calcipotriene, cyclosporine, diclofenac sodium/misoprostol, fluocinonide, glucos
  • Formula I can be combined include the following: sirolimus, paclitaxel, everolimus, tacrolimus, ABT-578, and acetaminophen.
  • Preferred examples of therapeutic agents for SLE (Lupus) with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: NSAEDS, for example, diclofenac, naproxen, ibuprofen, piroxicam, indomethacin; COX2 inhibitors, for example, celecoxib, rofecoxib, valdecoxib; anti-malarials, for example, hydroxychloroquine; steroids, for example, prednisone, prednisolone, budenoside, dexamethasone; cytotoxics, for example, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, mycophenolate mofetil, methotrexate; inhibitors of PDE4 or purine synthesis inhibitor, for example Cellcept®.
  • NSAEDS for example, diclofenac, naproxen, ibuprofen, piroxicam, indomethacin
  • COX2 inhibitors for example, celecoxib,
  • a compound of Formula I may also be combined with agents such as sulfasalazine, 5-aminosalicylic acid, olsalazine, Imuran® and agents which interfere with synthesis, production or action of proinflammatory cytokines such as IL-I, for example, caspase inhibitors like IL-l ⁇ converting enzyme inhibitors and IL-lra.
  • agents such as sulfasalazine, 5-aminosalicylic acid, olsalazine, Imuran® and agents which interfere with synthesis, production or action of proinflammatory cytokines such as IL-I, for example, caspase inhibitors like IL-l ⁇ converting enzyme inhibitors and IL-lra.
  • a compound of Formula I may also be used with T cell signaling inhibitors, for example, tyrosine kinase inhibitors; or molecules that target T cell activation molecules, for example, CTLA-4-IgG or anti-B7 family antibodies, anti-PD- 1
  • a compound of Formula I can be combined with IL-I l or anti-cytokine antibodies, for example, fonotolizumab (anti-EFNg antibody), or anti-receptor receptor antibodies, for example, anti-IL-6 receptor antibody and antibodies to B-cell surface molecules.
  • a compound of Formula I may also be used with LJP 394 (abetimus), agents that deplete or inactivate B-cells, for example, Rituximab (anti-CD20 antibody), lymphostat-B (anti-BlyS antibody), TNF antagonists, for example, anti-TNF antibodies, HUMIRATM (U.S. Patent No. US 6,090,382;), CA2 (REMICADETM), CDP 571, TNFR-Ig constructs, (p75TNFRIgG (ENBRELTM) and p55TNFRIgG (LENERCEPTTM).
  • the active compound may, if desired, be associated with other compatible pharmacologically active ingredients.
  • the compounds of this invention can be administered in combination with another therapeutic agent that is known to treat a disease or condition described herein.
  • additional pharmaceutical agents that inhibit or prevent the production of VEGF or angiopoietins, attenuate intracellular responses to VEGF or angiopoietins, block intracellular signal transduction, inhibit vascular hyperpermeability, reduce inflammation, or inhibit or prevent the formation of edema or neovascularization.
  • the compounds of the invention can be administered prior to, subsequent to or simultaneously with the additional pharmaceutical agent, whichever course of administration is appropriate.
  • the additional pharmaceutical agents include, but are not limited to, anti-edemic steroids, NSAIDS, ras inhibitors, anti-TNF agents, anti-ILl agents, antihistamines, PAF- antagonists, COX-I inhibitors, COX-2 inhibitors, NO synthase inhibitors, Akt/PTB inhibitors, IGF- IR inhibitors, PKC inhibitors, PB kinase inhibitors, calcineurin inhibitors and immunosuppressants.
  • the compounds of the invention and the additional pharmaceutical agents act either additively or synergistically.
  • the administration of such a combination of substances that inhibit angiogenesis, vascular hyperpermeability and/or inhibit the formation of edema can provide greater relief from the deletrious effects of a hyperproliferative disorder, angiogenesis, vascular hyperpermeability or edema than the administration of either substance alone.
  • combinations with antiproliferative or cytotoxic chemotherapies or radiation are included in the scope of the present invention.
  • One or more compounds of the invention can be administered to a human patient by themselves or in pharmaceutical compositions where they are mixed with biologically suitable carriers or excipient(s) at doses to treat or ameliorate a disease or condition as described herein. Mixtures of these compounds can also be administered to the patient as a simple mixture or in suitable formulated pharmaceutical compositions.
  • a therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of the compound or compounds sufficient to result in the prevention or attenuation of a disease or condition as described herein.
  • Techniques for formulation and administration of the compounds of the instant application may be found in references well known to one of ordinary skill in the art, such as "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences,” Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA, latest edition. Pharmaceutical Compositions and Modes of Administration
  • Suitable routes of administration may, for example, include oral, eyedrop, rectal, transmucosal, topical, or intestinal administration; parenteral delivery, including intramuscular, subcutaneous, intramedullary injections, as well as intrathecal, direct intraventricular, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intranasal, or intraocular injections.
  • compositions of the present invention may be manufactured in a manner that is itself known, e.g., by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee- making, levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping or lyophilizing processes.
  • compositions for use in accordance with the present invention thus may be formulated in a conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers comprising excipients and auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. Proper formulation is dependent upon the route of administration chosen.
  • the agents of the invention may be formulated in aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks' solution, Ringer's solution, or physiological saline buffer.
  • physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks' solution, Ringer's solution, or physiological saline buffer.
  • penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
  • the compounds can be formulated readily by combining the active compounds with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers well known in the art.
  • Such carriers enable the compounds of the invention to be formulated as tablets, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions and the like, for oral ingestion by a patient to be treated.
  • compositions for oral use can be obtained by combining the active compound with a solid excipient, optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores.
  • suitable excipients are, in particular, fillers such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; cellulose preparations such as, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, gum tragacanth, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and/or polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP).
  • PVP polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • disintegrating agents may be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, or alginic acid or a salt thereof such as sodium alginate.
  • Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings.
  • suitable coatings may be used, which may optionally contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures.
  • Dyestuffs or pigments may be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for identification or to characterize different combinations of active compound doses.
  • compositions which can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol.
  • the push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with filler such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers.
  • the active compounds may be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols.
  • stabilizers may be added. All formulations for oral administration should be in dosages suitable for such administration.
  • compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner.
  • the compounds for use according to the present invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoro- methane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoro- methane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount.
  • Capsules and cartridges of e.g. gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
  • Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes.
  • Aqueous injection suspensions may contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran.
  • the suspension may also contain suitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions.
  • the active ingredient may be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
  • a suitable vehicle e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water
  • the compounds may also be formulated in rectal compositions such as suppositories or retention enemas, e.g., containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides.
  • the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly or by intramuscular injection).
  • the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
  • An example of a pharmaceutical carrier for the hydrophobic compounds of the invention is a cosolvent system comprising benzyl alcohol, a nonpolar surfactant, a water-miscible organic polymer, and an aqueous phase.
  • the cosolvent system may be the VPD co-solvent system.
  • VPD is a solution of 3% w/v benzyl alcohol, 8% w/v of the nonpolar surfactant polysorbate 80, and 65% w/v polyethylene glycol 400, made up to volume in absolute ethanol.
  • the VPD co-solvent system (VPD:5W) consists of VPD diluted 1: 1 with a 5% dextrose in water solution.
  • This co-solvent system dissolves hydrophobic compounds well, and itself produces low toxicity upon systemic administration.
  • the proportions of a co-solvent system may be varied considerably without destroying its solubility and toxicity characteristics.
  • identity of the cosolvent components may be varied: for example, other low-toxicity nonpolar surfactants may be used instead of polysorbate 80; the fraction size of polyethylene glycol may be varied; other biocompatible polymers may replace polyethylene glycol, e.g. polyvinyl pyrrolidone; and other sugars or polysaccharides may substitute for dextrose.
  • other delivery systems for hydrophobic pharmaceutical compounds may be employed. Liposomes and emulsions are well known examples of delivery vehicles or carriers for hydrophobic drugs.
  • Certain organic solvents such as dimethysulfoxide also may be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity.
  • the compounds may be delivered using a sustained-release system, such as semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the therapeutic agent.
  • sustained-release materials have been established and are well known by those skilled in the art.
  • Sustained-release capsules may, depending on their chemical nature, release the compounds for a few weeks up to over 100 days.
  • additional strategies for protein stabilization may be employed.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions also may comprise suitable solid or gel phase carriers or excipients. Examples of such carriers or excipients include but are not limited to calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, and polymers such as polyethylene glycols.
  • salts may be provided as salts with pharmaceutically compatible counterions.
  • Pharmaceutically compatible salts may be formed with many acids, including but not limited to hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free base forms.
  • compositions suitable for use in the present invention include compositions wherein the active ingredients are contained in an effective amount to achieve its intended purpose. More specifically, a therapeutically effective amount means an amount effective to prevent development of or to alleviate the existing symptoms of the subject being treated. Determination of the effective amounts is well within the capability of those skilled in the art. Dosage
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cellular assays.
  • a dose can be formulated in cellular and animal models to achieve a circulating concentration range that includes the EC 50 as determined in cellular assays (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half- maximal inhibition of a given receptor activity).
  • the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half- maximal inhibition of a given receptor activity i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half- maximal inhibition of a given receptor activity.
  • Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans.
  • advangtageous compounds for systemic administration effectively modulate receptors of the SlP family in intact cells at levels that are safely achievable in plasma.
  • the dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
  • the exact formulation, route of administration and dosage can be chosen by the individual physician in view of the patient's condition. (See, e.g., Fingl et al, 1975, in "The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics", Ch. 1, p.l).
  • the administration of an acute bolus or an infusion approaching the MTD may be advantageous to obtain a rapid response.
  • Dosage amount and interval may be adjusted individually to provide plasma levels of the active moiety which are sufficient to modulate receptors of the SlP family, or minimal effective concentration (MEC).
  • MEC minimal effective concentration
  • the MEC will vary for each compound but can be estimated from in vitro data; e.g. the concentration necessary to achieve 50-90% inhibition of binding of the natural ligand using the assays described herein. Dosages necessary to achieve the MEC will depend on individual characteristics and route of administration. However, HPLC assays or bioassays can be used to determine plasma concentrations.
  • Tablets can be prepared by the method described in (b) above.
  • the tablets can be enteric coated in a conventional manner using a solution of 20% cellulose acetate phthalate and 3% diethyl phthalate in ethanohdichloromethane (1: 1). d) Suppositories
  • suppositories for example, 100 parts by weight of active compound can be incorporated in 1300 parts by weight of triglyceride suppository base and the mixture formed into suppositories each containing a therapeutically effective amount of active ingredient.
  • the present invention also comprises the use of a compound of Formula I as a medicament.
  • a further aspect of the present invention provides the use of a compound of Formula I or a salt thereof in the manufacture of a medicament for treating vascular hyperpermeability, angiogenesis-dependent disorders, proliferative diseases and/or disorders of the immune system in mammals, particularly human beings.
  • the present invention also provides a method of treating vascular hyperpermeability, inappropriate neovascularization, proliferative diseases and/or disorders of the immune system which comprises the administration of a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I to a mammal, particularly a human being, in need thereof.
  • the [ 35 S]GTPyS binding assay was performed using both scintillation proximity assay (SPA) and filtration methods. Both formats are advantageously run in 96 well plates and utilize membranes from stable or transient CHO human cell lines overexpressing SlPi, SlP 2 , SlP 3 , SlP 4 or SlP 5 . Compound stocks were made up to 10 mM using DMSO and serial dilutions were carried out using 100% DMSO. Compounds were transferred to 96 well plates to yield a final DMSO concentration of 1% for all assays (IuI for a lOOul assay volume).
  • SPA scintillation proximity assay
  • Frozen membranes were thawed and diluted in assay buffer containing of 20 mM HEPES pH 7.4, 0.1% fatty acid-free BSA, 10OmM NaCl, 5mM MgCl 2 and 10 ⁇ M GDP.
  • Assay buffer containing of 20 mM HEPES pH 7.4, 0.1% fatty acid-free BSA, 10OmM NaCl, 5mM MgCl 2 and 10 ⁇ M GDP.
  • SPA assay membranes are premixed with WGA-SPA beads to yield a final concentration per well of 5ug membrane and 500ug of bead.
  • membranes are added directly to the incubation plate at 5ug per well. The assay begins with the addition of 50ul of the membrane or membrane/bead mixture to each well of the assay plate. Next, 50ul of 0.4nM [ 35 S]GTPyS is added to each well and incubated for 30 minutes.
  • mobile phase A was 10 mM ammonium acetate
  • mobile phase B was HPLC grade acetonitrile.
  • the column used for the chromatography is a 4.6x30 mm Vydac Genesis C8 column (4 ⁇ m particles). The gradient was 5-60% B in 1.5 min then 60-95% B to 2.5 min with a hold at 95% B for 1.2 min (1.3 mL/min flow rate).
  • Mobile phase A was water with 0.1% formic acid
  • mobile phase B was HPLC grade acetonitrile.
  • Detection methods are diode array (DAD) and evaporative light scattering (ELSD) detection as well as pos/neg electrospray ionization.
  • DAD diode array
  • ELSD evaporative light scattering
  • a rhodium catalyst such as hydroxyl[(S)-BINAP]rodium(I) dimmer, or Rh(acac)(C 2 H 4 ) 2 /(/?)- BINAP (preferably
  • the two diastereomers can be separated by crystallization as follows: The material was separated into 2 batches of 110 g each. The crude material (110 g) was suspended in ACN (2.5 L), heated to 70 0 C until near complete dissolution occurred. The material was filtered rapidly at 70 0 C and rinsed with 70 0 C ACN (2 x 500 mL). The combined filtrates were reheated to about 65 0 C with stirring. After a clear solution was obtained the mixture was allowed to cool slowly to 50 0 C at which point material began to drop out of solution. The solution was allowed to slowly cool to 30 0 C with stirring (100 rpm).
  • N-alkylated hydantoin (1 equivalent) in water is added dioxane and an inorganic base (such as lithium hydroxide, or sodium hydroxide) (5 - 15 equivalents, preferably about 8 - 10 equivalents).
  • an inorganic base such as lithium hydroxide, or sodium hydroxide
  • the mixture is heated to reflux for a period of 16 - 48 hours (preferably 24 hours).
  • the reaction mixture is acidified, and filtered.
  • the filter cake is washed with a suitable solvent and dried under vacuum to give the corresponding amino acid.
  • an organic base such as piperidine, diethylamine or triethylamine
  • an organic solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, dioxane or DMF (preferably tetrahydrofuran).
  • the mixture is degassed before adding a palladium catalyst (such as tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium or bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride) (2 - 10 mol %, preferably 5 mol %) and copper® iodide (2 -10 mol %, preferably 5 mol %).
  • a palladium catalyst such as tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium or bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride
  • the reaction mixture is heated at 45 - 110 0 C (preferably about 60 0 C) for a period of 4 - 48 hours (preferably 24 - 36 hours) under inert atmosphere.
  • more alkyne compound (1 - 8 equivalents, preferably 2 - 4 equivalents) is added in portions to the reaction mixture to drive the reaction to completion.
  • the mixture Upon completion of the reaction, the mixture is concentrated to dryness, dissolved in a suitable organic solvent (such as EtOAc, or DCM), and washed with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO 3 , dried over an appropriate drying reagent (such as MgSO 4 , or Na 2 SO 4 ) and concentrated to dryness to give the crude product.
  • a suitable organic solvent such as EtOAc, or DCM
  • an appropriate drying reagent such as MgSO 4 , or Na 2 SO 4
  • the crude mixture was filtered through Celite® and washed with ethanol. The filtrate was concentrated, and the residue was brought up in a small amount of ethanol. Water was added. The mixture was nearly clear. The ethanol was removed under reduced pressure, and the remainingaqueous solution was left to stand. After a few minutes, needle-like crystals began to form. More water was added, and the mixture left to crystallize. The white solid was collected by filtration, and washed with water three times. The white solid was freeze-dried to remove remaining water.
  • a substituted 1-amino-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester dissolved in a suitable solvent is cooled to below room temperature (about 0 - 10 0 C, preferably 0 0 C).
  • a suitable solvent such as tetrahydrofuran or ether
  • LAH reducing reagent
  • the reaction mixture is stirred for a period of 0.5 - 6 hours (preferably 0.5 - 2 hours).
  • the reaction mixture is worked up by successive addition of n mL of water, n mL of 2 M NaOH solution, and 2n mL of water for n g of LAH used in the reaction. After stirred for a period of 1 -24 hours (preferably 2 hours), Na 2 SO 4 is added and the precipitate is filtered off.
  • the product precipitates out as hydrochloride by adding HCl to the filtrate.
  • a substituted l-amino-cyclopentanecarbonitrile in 6 M hydrochloric acid and dioxane is heated at 80 - 110 0 C (preferably about 100 0 C) for a period of 12 - 24 hours (preferably 16 hours).
  • the reaction mixture is cooled on ice.
  • the precipitate is collected by filtration and washed with water to give the desired product.
  • a methyl ether compound in a suitable solvent such as dichloromethane, or dichloroethane
  • a suitable solvent such as dichloromethane, or dichloroethane
  • BBr 3 (1 - 5 equivalents, preferably 3 equivalents
  • the reaction mixture is stirred at about 0 0 C for a period of 0.5 - 2 hours (preferably 0.5 hour).
  • the reaction is quenched with a protic solvent such as methanol or water, warmed up to room temperature, and concentrated to dryness.
  • the residue is triturated with water, filtered to give the desired product.
  • a solution of a phenol, an alcohol (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalents) and resin bound triphenylphospine (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 2.2 equivalents) in a suitable solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran, dichloromethane) is cooled to about 0 0 C.
  • An azodicarboxylate such as diethyl azodicarboxylate, diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, or di-t ⁇ rz-butyl azodicarboxylate
  • the reaction is warmed up to room temperature and shaken for a period of 2 - 24 hours (preferably 3 hours).
  • the resin is filtered off and rinsed with a suitable solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran, dichloromethane).
  • the filtrate is concentrated to dryness.
  • the crude product is further purified via flash chromatography.
  • a suitable solvent such as dioxane, or tetrahydrofuran
  • an inorganic base such as lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide
  • the reaction is concentrated, partitioned between a suitable organic solvent (such as ether, or ethyl acetate) and water.
  • the organic layer is dried over an appropriate drying reagent (such as Na 2 SO 4 , MgSO 4 ), filtered and concentrated.
  • the product can be isolated as an ammonium salt by treating the residue with an inorganic acid (such as HCl).
  • phosphate ester intermediate is taken up in a solution of HBr in acetic acid, stirred at 0-50 0 C (preferably room temperature) for 1-30 minutes (preferably 5 minutes) then concentrated.
  • the residue is triturated with a suitable organic solvent such as ether, ethyl acetate or acetonitrile (preferably acetonitrile), then is triturated with dilute aqueous ammonium acetate solution, filtered and dried.
  • a suitable organic solvent such as ether, ethyl acetate or acetonitrile (preferably acetonitrile)
  • a suitable solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, dioxane
  • a strong base such as LiHMDS, NaH
  • Tetrabenzyl diphosphate (1 - 1.5 equivalents, preferably 1.0 equivalents) is added to the mixture and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for a period of 0.5 - 4 hours (preferably 2 hour).
  • the reaction is briefly cooled to about 0 0 C and the precipitated solid is removed by filtration and the filtrate is concentrated.
  • the residue is taken up in a solution of HBr in acetic acid, stirred at 0-50°C (preferably room temperature) for 1-30 minutes (preferably 5 minutes) then concentrated.
  • the residue is triturated with a suitable organic solvent such as ether, ethyl acetate or acetonitrile (preferably acetonitrile), then is triturated with dilute aqueous ammonium acetate solution, filtered and dried.
  • a suitable solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, dioxane
  • a suitable inorganic base such as lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide
  • the mixture is heated at 45 - 65 0 C (preferably 50 0 C) for a period of 2 - 24 hours (preferably 4 - 5 hours).
  • the crude reaction is acidified with acid.
  • the precipitate is collected by filtration, washed with ether and water, dried to give the desired product.
  • a solution of substituted phenol in an organic solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran, DMF or dioxane) (preferably DMF) is added dropwise to a stirred suspension of Sodium Hydride in the same solvent at -10-30 0 C, preferably about 0 0 C under an inert atmosphere.
  • the alkylating agent for example Ethyl bromoacetate, Iodomethane, Iodoethane or tert-Butyl bromoacetate, is added dropwise to the stirred anion and then the reaction is warmed to 20-100 0 C, preferably room temperature for 1-24 hours. The reaction is then concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude product is taken up in Ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), filtered, concentrated and further purified via flash chromatography.
  • a solution of carboxylic acid in an organic solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran or dioxane) (preferably THF) is added dropwise to a stirred solution of borane in THF at 0-50 0 C, preferably about 23°C under an inert atmosphere.
  • the reaction is stirred at warmed to 20-50 0 C, preferably room temperature for 1-24 hours.
  • the reaction is then quenched by cautious addition of methanol at 0-50 0 C, preferably about room temperature.
  • the crude product is concentrated under reduced pressure, taken up in ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), filtered, and concentrated
  • the mixture is degassed before adding a palladium catalyst (such as tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, l,l'-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene palladium dichloride or bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride; preferably l,l'-bis(diphenylphosphino) ferrocene palladium dichloride) (2 - 10 mol %, preferably 5 mol %).
  • a palladium catalyst such as tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, l,l'-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene palladium dichloride or bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride; preferably l,l'-bis(diphenylphosphino) ferrocene palladium dichloride) (2 - 10 mol %,
  • the mixture is concentrated to dryness, dissolved in a suitable organic solvent (such as EtOAc, or DCM), and washed with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO 3 , dried over an appropriate drying reagent (such as MgSO 4 , or Na 2 SO 4 ) and concentrated to dryness to give the crude product.
  • a suitable organic solvent such as EtOAc, or DCM
  • an appropriate drying reagent such as MgSO 4 , or Na 2 SO 4
  • a Cbz-protected amine dissolved in an organic solvent such as methanol, ethanol or ethyl acetate; preferably ethanol
  • an organic solvent such as methanol, ethanol or ethyl acetate; preferably ethanol
  • the hydrogen gas is bubbled through the reaction for about 5 minutes.
  • the reaction is stirred under the atmosphere of hydrogen for a period of 1 - 48 hours (preferably 2 - 24 hours).
  • the progress of the reaction is monitored via LCMS.
  • the resulting crude reaction mixture is filtered through Celite® and the filtrate is concentrated in vacuo to yield crude product, which can be further purified via column chromatography or used as is for the next step.
  • organometalic reagent (1-3 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalents) is added to a solution of a beta-alkoxy enone in an organic solvent (preferably THF) at about -78 °C-room temperature (preferably 0 0 C). Following the addition the reaction mixture is allowed to warm to about room temperature. After Ih IN HCl is added until a pH of 1 is obtained. The reaction mixture is taken through an aqueous work-up and the crude product can be purified by chromatography.
  • organic solvent preferably THF
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with Et 2 O and the organic layer was separated, washed with NaHCO 3 , and brine, dried with Na 2 SO 4 , filtered and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel (EtOAc/Hep) to provide 3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclohex-2 -enone (9.5 g, 33.4 mmol, 65.9 % yield) as a colorless oil.
  • an ester in an organic solvent preferably THF
  • an organometallic reagent 2-10 equivalents, preferably 5 equivalents.
  • the reaction mixture is quenched with water and the crude product is extracted into a suitable organic solvent (preferably ether).
  • a suitable organic solvent preferably ether
  • the aqueous layer was extracted with Et 2 O (100 mL) sonicating for 15 min to break up the emulsion.
  • the combined organic layers were dried (Na 2 SO 4 ) filtered and cone, in vacuo.
  • the crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel (40 g) eluting with DCM:MeOH:HOAc:H 2 O (900:90:9: 1). The fractions containing the product were combined and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the resulting alkene was added to a slurry of palladium hydroxide on carbon (4.49 mg, 0.032 mmol) in MeOH (10.00 mL). Hydrogen was bubbled through the solution for 5 min and an atmosphere of hydrogen was maintained via balloon. After 15h the reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude alkane was purified by chromatography on silica gel (EtOAc/Hep) to provide (5R,7R)-7-(4-(7-methyloctyl)phenyl)-3-oxa-l- azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (120 mg, 0.349 mmol, 54.6 % yield) as a colorless solid.
  • a strong base preferably sodium hydride 0.5-2 equivalents (preferably 1 equivalent) in a suitable solvent (preferably DMF) is added an alkylating agent 1-5 equivalents (preferably 1.2 equivalent) followed by a solution of an alcohol. After the reaction is substantively complete the reaction mixture is taken through an aqueous work up and purified by chromatography or distillation.
  • l,4-dibromobutan-2-ol (0.5-2 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalent), an aniline (0.5-2 equivalents, preferably 1.0 equivalent), potassium carbonate (0.5-2 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalent) and a polar protic solvent (preferably water).
  • the reaction vial is heated in a microwave at (50-200 watts, preferably 100 watt), (50-200 0 C, preferably 120 0 C, (100-200 psi, preferably 150 psi), (ramp time of 2-10 min, preferably 5 min) and (hold time of 10-30 min, preferably 20 min).
  • an organic solvent preferably EtOAc
  • the organic layer is removed and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the crude product is purified by flash chromatography on silica gel.
  • the product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (eluting with EtO Ac/Hep) to provide 1- (4-octylphenyl)pyrrolidin-3-ol (3.7 g, 13.43 mmol, 53.7 % yield) as a white solid which was stored under nitrogen in a sealed flask.
  • a weak organic base preferably pyridine, 2-5 equivalents, preferably 3.5 equivalents
  • a carbodiimide preferably DCC, 1-3 equivalents, preferably 1.75 equivalents
  • an organic acid preferably TFA, 0.5-2 equivalents, preferably 1 equivalents
  • heptane extracts were purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with EtOAc/Hep to provide l-(4-octylphenyl)pyrrolidin-3-one (3.1 g, 11.34 mmol, 84 % yield) as a colorless solid.
  • Reaction is then filtered to remove the resin-bound borohydride and the resin washed 3 x with a suitable solvent (such as dichloromethane, methanol, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethylformamide, preferably methanol).
  • a suitable solvent such as dichloromethane, methanol, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethylformamide, preferably methanol.
  • the filtrate is collected, concentrated and chromatographed to give the desired product.
  • the aqueous layer was back-extracted with diethyl ether (150 mL).
  • the combined organic phase was wash with brine (15OmL), dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated to yield 5.89 g of colorless liquid.
  • the crude liquid was purified via Analogix FCC system using Biotage RS 330g column, with a gradient of 0-50% ether/pet, ether over 10 min. at 40 mL/min. then held at 50% for 50 min. Fractions containing product were combined and concentrated to yield hept-6-yn- l-ol (4.94 g, 44.0 mmol) as colorless liquid.
  • the title compound was also prepared according to procedure described by B. W.
  • the flask was evacuated and filled with nitrogen and then acetonitrile (12 mL) and 1- octyne (0.228 g, 2.07 mmol) were each added dropwise via syringe. The resulting mixture was heated at 100 °C for 72 h. The reaction was allowed to cool to rt and filtered through a pad of celite.

Abstract

The present invention is directed to novel, potent, and selective agents, which are agonists or antagonists of the one or more of the individual receptors of the S1P receptor family. The compounds of the invention are useful as therapeutics for treating medical conditions associated with agonism or antagonism of the individual receptors of the S1P receptor family.

Description

SPHINGOSINE- 1 -PHOSPHATE RECEPTOR AGONIST AND ANTAGONIST COMPOUNDS
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/876,288 filed on December 21, 2006 and U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/876,318 filed December 21, 2006, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Sphingosine-1 -phosphate (SlP) is part of the sphingomyelin biosynthetic pathway and is known to affect multiple biological processes. SlP is formed through phosphorylation of sphingosine by sphingosine kinases (SKl and SK2) and it is degraded through cleavage by sphingosine lyase to form palmitaldehyde and phosphoethanolamine or through dephosphorylation by phospholipid phosphatases. It is present at high levels (~500 nM) in serum, and it is found in most tissues. It can be synthesized in a wide variety of cells in response to several stimuli, which include cytokines, growth factors and G protein-coupled receptor (GPCR) ligands. The GPCRs that bind SlP (currently known as the SlP receptors SIP1.5), couple through pertusis toxin sensitive (Gi) pathways as well as pertusis toxin insensitive pathways to stimulate a variety of processes. The individual receptors of the SlP family are both tissue and response specific and therefore are attractive as therapeutic targets.
SlP evokes many responses from cells and tissues. In particular, SlP has been shown to be an agonist at all five GPCRs, SlP1 (Edg-1), SlP2 (Edg-5), SlP3 (Edg-3), SlP4 (Edg-6) and SlP5 (Edg-8). The action of SlP at the SlP receptors has been linked to resistance to apoptosis, changes in cellular morphology, cell migration, growth, differentiation, cell division, angiogenesis and modulation of the immune system via alterations of lymphocyte trafficking. Therefore, SlP receptors are targets for therapy of, for example, neoplastic diseases, autoimmune disorders and tissue rejection in transplantation. These receptors also share 50-55% amino acid identity with three other lysophospholipid receptors, LPAl, LPA2, and LPA3 of the structurally related lysophosphatidic acid (LPA). GPCRs are excellent drug targets with numerous examples of marketed drugs across multiple disease areas. GPCRs are cell surface receptors that bind hormones on the extracellular surface of the cell and transduce a signal across the cellular membrane to the inside of the cell. The internal signal is amplified through interaction with G proteins which in turn interact with various second messenger pathways. This transduction pathway is manifested in downstream cellular responses that include cytoskeletal changes, cell motility, proliferation, apoptosis, secretion and regulation of protein expression, to name a few. SIP receptors make good drug targets because individual receptors are expressed in different tissues and signal through different pathways, making the individual receptors both tissue and response specific. Tissue specificity of the SIP receptors is desirable because development of an agonist or antagonist selective for one receptor localizes the cellular response to tissues containing that receptor, limiting unwanted side effects. Response specificity of the SIP receptors is also of importance because it allows for the development of agonists or antagonists that initiate or suppress certain cellular responses without affecting other responses. For example, the response specificity of the SIP receptors could allow for an SlP mimetic that initiates platelet aggregation without affecting cell morphology.
The physiologic implications of stimulating individual SIP receptors are largely unknown due in part to a lack of receptor type selective ligands. Isolation and characterization of SIP analogs that have potent agonist or antagonist activity for SlP receptors have been limited.
SlP] for example is widely expressed, and the knockout causes embryonic lethality due to large vessel rupture. Adoptive cell transfer experiments using lymphocytes from SDPi knockout mice have shown that SlPj deficient lymphocytes sequester to secondary lymph organs. Conversely, T cells overexpressing SlPi partition preferentially into the blood compartment rather than secondary lymph organs. These experiments provide evidence that SlPi is the main sphingosine receptor involved in lymphocyte homing and trafficking to secondary lymphoid compartments
Currently, there is a need for novel, potent, and selective agents, which are agonists or antagonists of the individual receptors of the SlP receptor family in order to address unmet medical needs associated with agonism or antagonism of the individual receptors of the SlP receptor family.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention provides compounds of Formula I
Formula I
wherein
D is H, N(R5)2 or OR6;
X is CH, C(CH3) or N; Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (CrCi0) alkyl;
A is H, hydroxy, -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(OH)(CH3)2, -0(CH2),-C00H ,-, -C(O)-NR6, optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-0- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(R7), -CH=CH-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), C(O)-NHCH3, CN, COOR6 or -R4-C00H, wherein R4 is straight or branched (C1-C20) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-C2o) alkenylene, straight or branched (C1-C20) alkynylene, (C3- C2o)cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted azetidinyl; R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF3, halo, (Cp
C20) alkyl, (Ci -C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C2o) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2- C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted (CrC20)alkyl, heteroaryl substituted (C2-C20)alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-C20) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (C]-C20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (CrC2o) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R1 and R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R5 is independently H, optionally substituted (Ci-C3)alkyl, or -C(O)-O-(Cj -C3)alkyl- optionally substituted phenyl; each R6 is independently H or optionally substituted (C]-C2)alkyl; each R7 is independently H, optionally substituted (C]-C2)alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl; m is 1 or 2; n is 1, 2 or 3; t is 1, 2 or 3; and u is O, 1 or 2; provided that A and D are not both Hat the same time.; and provided the compound is not
wherein X is CH or N;
Y is CH2, NH, N(CH3), S or O.
In a second embodiment the invention provides compounds of the foregoing embodiment wherein
A is H, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(O)-NR6, CN, C(O)-NHCH3, COOR6, -R4-C00H, or optionally substituted azetidinyl, wherein R4 is straight or branched (CrC2o) alkylene, straight or branched (C1-C20) alkenylene, straight or branched (C1-C20) alkynylene;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, (Ci-Ci0) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-Ci0) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-Ci0) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-Ci0) alkenyl, (C2-C]0) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2-Ci0) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted (CrCi0) alkyl, heteroaryl substituted (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, aryl substituted (C1-C10) alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted (CrCio) alkoxy, (Ci-Ci0) alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl and aryl substituted arylalkyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, halo, hydroxy, (CrCi0) alkoxy, or CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-Ci0) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R1 and R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo.
In a third embodiment the invention provides compounds according to any of the foregoing embodiments wherein the compound is a formula of Formula Ia:
Formula Ia
and isomers, stereoisomers, esters, prodrugs, and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof, wherein;
X is CH;
Y is CH2 or O; A is -C(O)-OCH3, -COOH, -R4-C00H, -C(O)-NHCH3, or optionally substituted azetidinyl; wherein R4 is straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkenylene, or straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkynylene;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, (Ci-Ci0) alkoxy, (C3-Ci0) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-Ci0) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy,
(C2-Ci0) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-Ci0) alkenyl, (C2-Ci0) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2-Ci0) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted (Ci-Cio)alkyl, heteroaryl substituted (CrCi0)alkyl, aryl substituted (Ci-Cio)alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted (CrCi0)alkoxy, (C1-C10)HIlCyI substituted aryl, arylalkyl and aryl substituted arylalkyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with (C1-C10) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (C1-C10) alkoxy, or CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (C1-C10) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; and n is 1 or 2.
In a fourth embodiment the invention provides compounds according to any of the foregoing embodiments wherein Y is CH2;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (C1-C10) alkyl, (C2-C10) alkenyl, (C2-C10) alkynyl and aryl substituted (C1-C10) alkyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with (C1-C10) alkyl, halo, hydroxy, (C1-C10) alkoxy, or CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen.
In a fifth embodiment the invention provides compounds according to any of the foregoing embodiments wherein
X is CH; Y is CH2;
A is COOH;
R1 is (Ci-C10)alkyl, (C2-C10)alkenyl or (C2-C10)alkynyl; R2 is H; and m is 1.
In a sixth embodiment the invention provides compounds according to any of the foregoing embodiments wherein the compound is
In a seventh embodiment the invention provides compounds according to the first embodiment wherein
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or (CrCi0) alkyl;
A is H, -CH2OH, -CH2OH5-C(O)-OCH3, -optionally substituted -(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-O-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), -CH=CH-O- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7) or CN ,
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, straight or branched (C1-C10) alkyl, (CrCi0) alkoxy, (C3-Ci0) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C10) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C10) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C10) alkenyl, (C2-Ci0) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2-C10) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted (CrC10)alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, (C1-C10)alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from straight or branched (C1-C10) alkyl, halo, hydroxy, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C10) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo;
R6 is independently selected from H or optionally substituted (CrC2)alkyl;
R7 is independently selected from H or optionally substituted (Q-C2)alkyl; and u is 1 or 2.
In an eighth embodiment the invention provides compounds according to embodiments one and seven wherein the compound is a compound of Formula Ib:
Formula Ib wherein;
X is CH or N;
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or (C1-C20) alkyl;
A is -CH2-OH, optionally substituted -CH2-P(=(O)(OR7)(OR7) or optionally substituted - CH2-O-P(=(O)(OR7)(OR7);
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (CrC20) alkyl, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl and aryl substituted arylalkyl; wherein such R2 groups may be optionally substituted with (CrC20) alkyl, halo, hydroxy, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, or CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C20) alkyl group; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo. In a ninth embodiment the invention provides compounds of any of the embodiments one, seven and eight wherein X is CH;
Y is CH2;
A is -CH2OH, optionally substituted -(CH2)n-O-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7) or optionally substituted -(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7) ;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, aryl substituted (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, (Ci-Cio)alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, halo and (Ci-Ci0) alkoxy; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R6 is independently selected from H or optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl; and u is 1 or 2. In a tenth embodiment, the invention provides compounds of embodiments one, seven, eight and nine wherein
A is -CH2OH or optionally substituted -(CH2)n-O-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), D is NH2;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted (CrCi0) alkyl; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen;; m is 1; and u is l.
In an eleventh emobodiment the invention provides compounds of embodiments one, seven, eight, nine and ten wherein the compound is
In a twelfth embodiment the invention provides compounds of the formula
In a thirteenth embodiment the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I
Formula I wherein
D is H, N(R5)2 , or OR6;
X is CH, C(CH3) or N; Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (Ci-Cio) alkyl;
A is H, hydroxy, -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(OH)(CH3)2, -0(CH2),-C00H,-, -C(O)-NR6, optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-O- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(R7), -CH=CH-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), C(O)-NHCH3, CN, COOR6 or -R4-COOH, wherein R4 is straight or branched (C1-C20) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkenylene, straight or branched (Ci -C20) alkynylene, (C3- C∑cOcycloalkyl, or optionally substituted azetidinyl;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF3, halo, (Ci- C20) alkyl, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C2o) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2- C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-C20) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (C1-C20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C20) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R5 is independently H, optionally substituted (C,-C3)alkyl, or -C(O)-O-(CrC3)alkyl- optionally substituted phenyl; each R6 is independently H or optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl; each R7 is independently H, optionally substituted (CrC2)alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl; m is 1 or 2; n is 1, 2 or 3; t is 1, 2 or 3; and u is 0, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier.
In a fourteenth embodiment the invention provides a method of treating a disorder comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of Formula I
Formula I wherein D is H, N(R5)2 , or OR6;
X is CH, C(CH3) or N;
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (CrCi0) alkyl; A is H, hydroxy, -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(OH)(CH3)2, -0(CH2)t-C00H ,-, -C(O)-NR6, optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-O- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(R7), -CH=CH-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), C(O)-NHCH3, CN, COOR6 or -R4-C00H, wherein R4 is straight or branched (C1-C20) alkylene, straight or branched (CrC20) alkenylene, straight or branched (C1-C20) alkynylene, (C3- C20)cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted azetidinyl;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF3, halo, (C1- C20) alkyl, (C1-C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2-
C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-C20) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C20) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R5 is independently H, optionally substituted (C,-C3)alkyl, or -C(O)-O-(C,-C3)alkyl- optionally substituted phenyl; each R6 is independently H or optionally substituted (CrC2)alkyl; each R7 is independently H, optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl; m is 1 or 2; n is 1, 2 or 3; t is 1, 2 or 3; and u is 0, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof.
In a fifteenth embodiment the invention provides a method of claim 14 wherein the disorder is rheumatoid arthritis, lupus, Crohn's disease, asthma, diabetes, pain or psoriasis.
In a sixteenth embodiment the invention provides a method of treating a central nervous system disorder comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of Formula I wherein
D is H, N(R5)2 , or OR6;
X is CH, C(CH3) or N; Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkyl;
A is H, hydroxy, -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(OH)(CH3)2, -O(CH2)t-COOH ,-, -C(O)-NR6, optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-O- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(R7), -CH=CH-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), C(O)-NHCH3, CN, COOR6 or -R4-C00H, wherein R4 is straight or branched (C1-C20) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkenylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkynylene, (C3- C20)cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted azetidinyl;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF3, halo, (Q- C20) alkyl, (C, -C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2- C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-C20) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (C1-C20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C20) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R5 is independently H, optionally substituted (C,-C3)alkyl, or -C(O)-O-(C, -C3)alkyl- optionally substituted phenyl; each R6 is independently H or optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl; each R7 is independently H, optionally substituted (CrC2)alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl; m is 1 or 2; n is 1, 2 or 3; t is 1, 2 or 3; and u is 0, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof.
In a seventeeth embodiment the invention provides a method of treating multiple sclerosis comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of any of the foregoing embodiments or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof.
In an eighteenth embodiment the invention provides a packaged pharmaceutical comprising one or more compounds according to Formula I
Formula I wherein
D is H, N(R5)2 , or OR6;
X is CH, C(CH3) or N;
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkyl; A is H, hydroxy, -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(OH)(CH3)2, -0(CH2)t-C00H,-
-C(O)-NR6, optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-0- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(R7), -CH=CH-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), C(O)-NHCH3, CN, COOR6 or -R4-C00H, wherein R4 is straight or branched (C1-C20) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkenylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkynylene, (C3- C20)cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted azetidinyl;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF3, halo, (Cr C20) alkyl, (C]-C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C2o) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C2O) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2- C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci -C20) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (C1-C20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Cj-C2o) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R5 is independently H, optionally substituted (CrC3)alkyl, or -C(O)-O-(CrC3)alkyl- optionally substituted phenyl; each R6 is independently H or optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl; each R7 is independently H, optionally substituted (CrC2)alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl; m is 1 or 2; n is 1, 2 or 3; t is 1, 2 or 3; and u is 0, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof and instructions for use.
In a nineteeth embodiment the invention provides the packaged pharmaceutical according to embodiment eighteen wherein the compound or compounds are present in a therapeutically effective amount.
In a twentieth embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 2
Formula 2 In a twenty-first embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 3
Formula 3 In a twenty-second embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 4
Formula 4
In a twenty-third embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 5
Formula 5
In a twenty-fourth embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 6
Formula 6 In a twenty -fifth embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 7
Formula 7
In a twenty -sixth embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 8
Formula 8
In a twenty-seventh embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 9
Formula 9
In a twenty-eighth embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 10
Formula 10 In a twenty-ninth embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 11
Formula 11
In a thirtieth embodiment the invention provides a compound of Formula 12
Formula 12
In another embodiment, R1 or R2 are independently fluorine or chlorine or fluoro- or chloro- substituted alkyl.
In another embodiment, Z is hydroxy or -OPO3H2.
In another embodiment, the α-substituted phosphonate is -CHFPO3H2, -CF2PO3H2, -CHOHPO3H2, -C=OPO3H2 or -OPO2SH2.
In a further embodiment, the α-substituted phosphonate is -CHFPO3H2, -CF2PO3H2, - CHOHPO3H2, or -C=OPO3H2.
In another embodiment, R1 is hydrogen and R2 is alkyl, akenyl, or alkynyl having 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 carbon atoms. In another embodiment, R1 is hydrogen and R2 is heptyl, octyl, nonyl, -O-heptyl,
-O-octyl, or -O-nonyl.
In another embodiment, R1 is hydrogen and R2 is -(CH2)n-OCH3, -(CH2)n-OCF3, -O-(CH2)n-OCH3, or -O-(CH2)n-OCF3, where n is an integer from 1-20, preferably 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
In compounds of Formula I, the R2 group may be an ortho, meta or para substituent on the phenyl ring, preferably para. The R1 group may be an ortho, meta or para substituent on the phenyl ring, preferably meta.
Preferred embodiments of compounds according to Formula I exhibit greater specificity for particular SlP receptors or greater potency than SlP receptor agonist compounds reported previously. In another aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising one or more compounds according to Formula I, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, hydrates, metabolites, prodrugs or stereoisomers thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier. In a preferred aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition wherein the compound or compounds are present in a therapeutically effective amount. In a related aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition wherein the compound or compounds are present in a prophylactically effective amount.
In still another aspect, the invention provides a packaged pharmaceutical comprising one or more compounds according to Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, hydrates, metabolites, prodrugs or stereoisomers thereof and instructions for use. In one embodiment, the invention provides a packaged pharmaceutical wherein the compound or compounds are present in a therapeutically effective amount. In another embodiment, the invention provides a packaged pharmaceutical wherein the compound or compounds are present in a prophylactically effective amount.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The present invention provides novel compounds of Formula I:
Formula I and isomers, stereoisomers, esters, prodrugs, and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof, wherein;
X is CH or N;
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or (C1-C10) alkyl; Z is hydroxy, phosphate, phosphonate, or α-substituted phosphonate;
R1 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (Ci-C20) alkyl, (C1-C20) alkyl substituted with halo, hydroxy, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, or CN; and
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (CrC20) alkyl, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl and aryl substituted arylalkyl; wherein such R2 groups may be optionally substituted with (Ci-C20) alkyl, halo, hydroxy, (CrC2o) alkoxy, or CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR4; wherein R4 is hydrogen or (Q-Cao) alkyl; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo. Exemplary compounds according to the invention include, e.g.,
[^fi.JSH-Arnino^-^-oct-l-ynyl-phenyO-cyclopentylJ-methanol;
[(7/?,55)-l-Amino-3-(4-octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentyl]-methanol; {(7Λ,3S)-l-Amino-3-[4-(3-phenoxy-propyl)-phenyl]-«:yclopentyl}-methanol;
[ ( 1 R, 3R)- 1 -Amino-3 -(4-oct- 1 -y ny 1-pheny 1 )-cy c lopenty 1] -methanol ;
{(7/?,3/?)-l-Amino-3-[4-(4-pheny!-but-l-ynyl)-phenyl]-cyciopentyl }-methanol;
[( IR, 3R)- 1 -Amino-3 -(4-hex- 1 -ynyl-pheny l)-cyclopenty 1] -methanol ;
[(1R, 3R)- 1 -Amino-3 -(4-hept- 1 -yny l-phenyl)-cyclopentyl] -methanol ; {(yΛ.J/^-l-Amino-S-^-Cό-methoxy-hex-l-ynyO-phenylJ-cyclopentyl J-methanol;
{ ( 7 R, 3R)- 1 -Amino-3-[4-(3-phenyl-prop- 1 -ynyl)-pheny 1] -cyclopentyl } -methanol;
{(/Λ.J^-l-Amino-S-^-CS-phenyl-pent-l-ynyO-phenylJ-cyclopentyπ-methanol;
[(/Λ.J/^-l-Amino-S-^-octyl-phenyO-cyclopentylJ-methanol;
{ ( IR, 3R)- 1 -Amino-3-[4-(4-phenyl-butyl)-pheny l]-cyclopenty 1 } -methanol; { (7/?,3Λ)-l-Amino-3-[4-(3-phenoxy-propyl)-phenyl]-cyclopentyl }-methanol;
{(y^J^-l-Amino-S-K-Cό-methoxy-hexyO-phenyll-cyclopentyπ-methanol;
{(yΛ.i^-l-Amino-S-K-CS-phenyl-propyO-phenyll-cyclopentyπ-methanol;
{(y/Ϊ.J/^-l-Amino-S-I^MS-phenyl-pentyO-phenylJ-cyclopentyl } -methanol;
{(iR.J^-l-Amino-S-^^-propoxy-butyO-phenyll-cyclopentyl J-methanol; [(lR,3R)-l-Amino-3-(4-octyloxy-phenyl)-cyclopentyl]-methanol;
{(7/?,3/?)-l-Amino-3-[4-(2-m-tolyloxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]-cyclopentyl }-methanol;
((77?,J/?)-l-Amino-3-{4-[2-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-ethoxy]-phenyl }-cyclopentyl)-methanol;
{(77?,57?)-l-Amino-3-[4-(2-p-tolyloxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]-cyclopentyl }-methanol;
[(77?, 3R)- 1 -Amino-3-(4-heptyloxy-phenyl)-cyclopentyl] -methanol ; [(77?,J7?)-l-Amino-3-(4-nonyloxy-phenyl)-cyclopentyl]-methanol;
{ (7/?,37?)-l-Amino-3-[4-(2-pentyIoxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]-cyclopentyl }-methanol;
{ (77?,3/?)-l-Amino-3-[4-(2-p-tolyl-ethoxy)-phenyl]-cyclopentyl }-methanol;
((7/?,J7?)-l-Amino-3-{4-[3-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-propoxy]-phenyl }-cyclopentyl)-methanol;
((77?,J7?)-l-Amino-3-{4-[2-(2-methoxy-ethoxy)-ethoxy]-phenyl }-cyclopentyl)-methanol; ((77?,i?R)-l-Amino-3-{4-[2-(4-ethoxy-phenyl)-ethoxy]-phenyl }-cyclopentyl)-methanol;
{(7/?,J/?)-l-Amino-3-[4-(4-methanesulfonyl-butoxy)-phenyl]-cyclopentyl } -methanol;
{(/Λ.J^-l-Amino-S-^^S-methoxy-pentyloxy^phenyπ-cyclopentyl } -methanol;
{(7/?,J7?)-l-Amino-3-[4-(2-phenoxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]-cyclopentyl } -methanol; ((//?,3Λ)-l-Amino-3-{4-[2-(3-methoxy-phenyl)-ethoxy]-phenyl }-cyclopentyl)-methanol; (( 1 R, 3R)- 1 -Amino-3- { 4-[3-(3-methoxy-pheny l)-propoxy] -phenyl } -cyclopenty l)-methanol ; ((7/?,3/?)-l-Amino-3-{4-[3-(3,5-dimethoxy-phenyl)-propoxy]-phenyl }-cyclopentyl)- methanol; ((7Λ,3/?)-l-Amino-3-{4-[2-(4-methoxy-3,5-dimethyl-phenyl)-ethoxy]-phenyl }- cycIopentyO-methanol;
(( 1 R, 3R)-I -Amino-3- { 4-[2-(4-benzy loxy-pheny l)-ethoxy] -phenyl } -cyclopentyl)-methanol ; {(7/?,J/?)-l-Amino-3-[4-(3-phenyl-propoxy)-phenyl]-cyclopentyl }-methanoI; Phosphoric acid mono-{(77?,3/?)-l-amino-3-[4-(4-phenyl-butyl)-phenyl]- cyclopentylmethyl } ester;
Phosphoric acid mono-{ (77?,37?)-l-amino-3-[4-(3-phenoxy-propyl)-phenyl]- cyclopentylmethyl } ester;
Phosphoric acid mono-[(77?,35)-l-amino-3-(4-octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentylmethyl] ester;
Phosphoric acid mono-[(77?,J7?)-l-amino-3-(4-octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentylmethyl] ester; Phosphoric acid mono-[(7/?,3S>l-amino-3-(3-decyI-phenyl)-cyclopentylmethyl] ester;
Phosphoric acid mono-[(7/?,37?)-l-amino-3-(4-nonyloxy-phenyl)-cyclopentylmethyl] ester; Phosphoric acid mono-{(77?,37?)-l-arnino-3-[4-(2-p-tolyloxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]- cyclopentylmethyl } ester;
Phosphoric acid mono-((77?,37?)-l-amino-3-{4-[2-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-ethoxy]-phenyl }- cyclopentylmethyl) ester;
Phosphoric acid mono- {(77?, 3R)- 1 -amino-3-[4-(3-pheny 1-propy l)-pheny 1] - cyclopentylmethyl } ester;
Phosphoric acid mono-[(7/?, J7?)-l-amino-3-(4-octyloxy-phenyl)-cyclopentylmethyl] ester; Phosphoric acid mono-{(77?,J7?)-l-amino-3-[4-(6-methoxy-hexyl)-phenyl]- cyclopentylmethyl} ester;
Phosphoric acid mono-[(7/?,55)-l-amino-3-(4-octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentylmethyl] ester; Phosphoric acid mono-[(77?,35)-l-amino-3-(4-heptyl-phenyl)-cyclopentylmethyl] ester; Phosphoric acid mono-{(77?,J7?)-l-amino-3-[4-(2-pentyloxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]- cyclopentylmethyl } ester; Phosphoric acid mono-{(77?,37?)-l-amino-3-[4-(2-m-tolyloxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]- cyclopentylmethyl } ester; Phosphoric acid mono-{(77?,J7?)-l-amino-3-[4-(2-p-tolyl-ethoxy)-phenyl]- cyclopentylmethyl } ester;
Phosphoric acid mono-[(7/?,37?)-l-amino-3-(4-heptyloxy-phenyl)-cyclopentylmethyl] ester; Phosphoric acid mono-((lR,3R)-l-armno-3-{4-[3-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-propoxy]-phenyl }- cyclopentylmethyl) ester; Phosphoric acid mono-((//?,3/?)-l-amino-3-{4-[2-(2-methoxy-ethoxy)-ethoxy]-phenyI }- cyclopentylmethyl) ester; Phosphoric acid mono-((7/?,5R)-l-amino-3-{4-[2-(4-ethoxy-phenyl)-ethoxy]-phenyl }- cyclopentylmethyl) ester; Phosphoric acid mono-{(7/?,.?7?)-l-amino-3-[4-(2-phenoxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]- cyclopentylmethyl } ester; Phosphoric acid mono-((7/?,3/?)-l-amino-3-{4-[2-(3-methoxy-phenyl)-ethoxy]-phenyl }- cyclopentylmethyl) ester;
Phosphoric acid mono-((77?,3Λ)-l-arnino-3-{4-[3-(3-methoxy-phenyl)-propoxy]-phenyl }- cyclopentylmethyl) ester;
Phosphoric acid mono-((77?,37?)-l-amino-3-{4-[3-(3,5-dimethoxy-phenyl)-propoxy]- phenyl } -cyclopentylmethyl) ester; Phosphoric acid mono-((77?,37?)-l-amino-3-{4-[2-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)-ethoxy]-phenyl }- cyclopentylmethyl) ester; Phosphoric acid mono-{(77?,J7?)-l-amino-3-[4-(3-phenyl-propoxy)-phenyl]- cyclopentylmethyl } ester; Phosphoric acid mono-{ (77?,3S)-l-amino-3-[4-(3-phenoxy-propyl)-phenyl]- cyclopentylmethyl } ester. Exemplary compounds of Formula I include: (77?,3/?)-l-Amino-3-(4-oct-l-ynyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid; (77?,3S)-l-Amino-3-(4-non-l-ynyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxyIic acid (77?,3S)-l-Arnino-3-(4-nonyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid; (77?, 3S)-I -Amino-3-(4-dec-l-ynyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid; (77?,55)-l-Amino-3-(4-decyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid (77?,35)-l-Amino-3-[4-(7-methoxy-hept-l-ynyl)-phenyl]-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid; (77?,37?)-l-Amino-3-[4-(3-phenoxy-propyl)-phenyl]-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid; (77?,3S)-l-Amino-3-(4-oct-l-ynyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid (77?,J5)-l-Amino-3-(4-hept-l-ynyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid (77?,35)-l-Amino-3-(4-heptyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid.
DEFINITIONS
In this invention, the following definitions are applicable:
A "therapeutically effective amount" is an amount of a compound of Formula I or a combination of two or more such compounds, which inhibits, totally or partially, the progression of the condition or alleviates, at least partially, one or more symptoms of the condition. A therapeutically effective amount can also be an amount which is prophylactically effective. The amount which is therapeutically effective will depend upon the patient's size and gender, the condition to be treated, the severity of the condition and the result sought. For a given patient, a therapeutically effective amount can be determined by methods known to those of skill in the art.
"Physiologically acceptable salts" or "pharmaceutically acceptable salts" refers to those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the free bases and which are obtained by reaction with inorganic acids, for example, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, and phosphoric acid or organic acids such as sulfonic acid, carboxylic acid, organic phosphoric acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, citric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, L-aspartic acid, L-mandelic, L-succinic acid, benzoic acid, salicylic acid, lactic acid, tartaric acid (e.g. (+) or (-)-tartaric acid or mixtures thereof), amino acids (e.g. (+) or (-)-amino acids or mixtures thereof), and the like. These salts can be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art.
Certain compounds of Formula I which have acidic substituents may exist as salts with pharmaceutically acceptable bases. The present invention includes such salts. Examples of such salts include sodium salts, potassium salts, lysine salts and arginine salts. These salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art.
Certain compounds of Formula I and their salts may exist in more than one crystal form and the present invention includes each crystal form and mixtures thereof.
Certain compounds of Formula I and their salts may also exist in the form of solvates, for example hydrates, and the present invention includes each solvate and mixtures thereof. Certain compounds of Formula I may contain one or more chiral centers, and exist in different optically active forms. When compounds of Formula I contain one chiral center, the compounds exist in two enantiomeric forms and the present invention includes both enantiomers and mixtures of enantiomers, such as racemic mixtures. The enantiomers may be resolved by methods known to those skilled in the art, for example by formation of diastereoisomeric salts which may be separated, for example, by crystallization; formation of diastereoisomeric derivatives or complexes which may be separated, for example, by crystallization, gas-liquid or liquid chromatography; selective reaction of one enantiomer with an enantiomer-specific reagent, for example enzymatic esterification; or gas-liquid or liquid chromatography in a chiral environment, for example on a chiral support for example silica with a bound chiral ligand or in the presence of a chiral solvent. It will be appreciated that where the desired enantiomer is converted into another chemical entity by one of the separation procedures described above, a further step may be used to liberate the desired enantiomeric form. Alternatively, specific enantiomers may be synthesized by asymmetric synthesis using optically active reagents, substrates, catalysts or solvents, or by converting one enantiomer into the other by asymmetric transformation. When a compound of Formula I contains more than one chiral center, it may exist in diastereoisomeric forms. The diastereoisomeric compounds may be separated by methods known to those skilled in the art, for example chromatography or crystallization and the individual stereoismers may be separated as described above. The present invention includes each diastereoisomer of compounds of Formula I and mixtures thereof.
Certain compounds of Formula I may exist in different tautomeric forms or as different geometric isomers, and the present invention includes each tautomer and/or geometric isomer of compounds of Formula I and mixtures thereof.
Certain compounds of Formula I may exist in different stable conformational forms which may be separable. Torsional asymmetry due to restricted rotation about an asymmetric single bond, for example because of steric hindrance or ring strain, may permit separation of different conformers. The present invention includes each conformational isomer of compounds of Formula I and mixtures thereof.
Certain compounds of Formula I may exist in zwitterionic form and the present invention includes each zwitterionic form of compounds of Formula I and mixtures thereof.
As used herein the term "pro-drug" or "prodrug" refers to an agent which is converted into the parent drug in vivo by some physiological chemical process (e.g., a prodrug on being brought to the physiological pH is converted to the desired drug form). Pro-drugs are often useful because, in some situations, they may be easier to administer than the active metabolite. They may, for instance, be bioavailable by oral administration whereas the parent drug is not. The prodrug may also have improved solubility in pharmacological compositions over the active metabolite. An example, without limitation, of a pro-drug would be a compound of the present invention wherein it is administered as an ester (the "pro-drug") to facilitate transmittal across a cell membrane where water solubility is not beneficial, but then it is metabolically hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid once inside the cell where water solubility is beneficial
Pro-drugs have many useful properties. For example, a pro-drug may be more water soluble than the ultimate drug, thereby facilitating oral administration of the drug. A pro-drug may also have a higher level of oral bioavailability than the ultimate drug. After administration, the prodrug is enzymatically or chemically cleaved to deliver the ultimate drug in the blood or tissue.
Exemplary pro-drugs upon cleavage release the corresponding free acid, and such hydrolyzable ester-forming residues of the compounds of this invention include but are not limited to carboxylic acid substituents (e.g., -(CH2)C(O)OH or a moiety that contains a carboxylic acid) wherein the free hydrogen is replaced by (Ci-C4) alkyl, (C2-Ci2) alkanoyloxymethyl, (C4-C9) 1- (alkanoyloxy)ethyl, l-methyl-l-(alkanoyloxy)-ethyl having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms, l-(alkoxycarbonyloxy)ethyl having from 4 to 7 carbon atoms, 1 -methyl- l-(alkoxycarbonyloxy)ethyl having from 5 to 8 carbon atoms, N-(alkoxycarbonyl)aminomethyl having from 3 to 9 carbon atoms, 1-(N- (alkoxycarbonyl)amino)ethyl having from 4 to 10 carbon atoms, 3-phthalidyl, 4-crotonolactonyl, gamma-butyrolacton-4-yl, di-N,N-(Ci-C2)alkylamino(C2-C3)alkyl (such as β-dimethylaminoethyl), carbamoyl-(Ci-C2)alkyl, N,N-di(Ci-C2)-alkylcarbamoyl-(Ci-C2)alkyl and piperidino-, pyrrolidino- or moφholino(C2-C3)alkyl.
Other exemplary pro-drugs release an alcohol of Formula I wherein the free hydrogen of the hydroxy substituent (e.g., Z contains hydroxy) is replaced by phosphate (PO4), (Ci- C6)alkanoyloxymethyl, l-((CrC6)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, l-methyl-l-((Ci-C6)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, (Cr C6)alkoxycarbonyloxy-methyl, N-(Ci-C6)alkoxycarbonylamino-methyl, succinoyl, (Ci-C6)alkanoyl, α-amino(Ci-C4)alkanoyl, arylacyl and α-aminoacyl, or α-aminoacyl-α-aminoacyl wherein said α- aminoacyl moieties are independently any of the naturally occurring L-amino acids found in proteins, -P(O)(OH)2, -P(O)(O(CrC6)alkyl)2 or glycosyl (the radical resulting from detachment of the hydroxy of the hemiacetal of a carbohydrate).
The terms "heterocyclic" or "heterocyclyl", as used herein, include non-aromatic ring systems, including, but not limited to, monocyclic, bicyclic and tricyclic rings, which can be completely saturated or which can contain one or more units of unsaturation (for the avoidance of doubt, the degree of unsaturation does not result in an aromatic ring system) and have 3 to 12 atoms including at least one heteroatom, such as nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. For purposes of exemplification, which should not be construed as limiting the scope of this invention, the following are examples of heterocyclic rings: azepines, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, oxopiperidinyl, oxopyrrolidinesyl, piperazinyl, piperidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, quinicludinyl, thiomorpholinyl, tetrahydropyranyl and tetrahydrofuranyl. The term "heteroaryl" as used herein, include aromatic ring systems, including, but not limited to, monocyclic, bicyclic and tricyclic rings, and have 3 to 12 atoms including at least one heteroatom, such as nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. For purposes of exemplification, which should not be construed as limiting the scope of this invention: azaindole, benzo(b)thienyl, benzimidazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, furans, imidazoles, imidazopyridine, indole, indolinyl, indazoles, isoindolinyl, isoxazoles, isothiazoles, oxadiazoles, oxazoles, purine, pyrans, pyrazines, pyrazoles, pyridines, pyrimidines, pyrroles, pyrrolo[2,3- djpyrimidine, pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidine), quinolines, quinazolines, triazoles, thiazoles, thiophenyl, tetrahydroindole, tetrazoles, thiadiazoles, thienyls, thiomorpholines, triaozles or tropanyl.
When the term "substituted heterocyclic" (or heterocyclyl) or "substituted heteroaryl" is used, what is meant is that the heterocyclic group is substituted with one or more substituents that can be made by one of ordinary skill in the art and results in a molecule that is an agonist or antagonist of the sphingosine receptor family. For purposes of exemplification, which should not be construed as limiting the scope of this invention, preferred substituents for the heterocycle of this invention are each independently selected from the optionally substituted group consisting of alkenyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylheterocycloalkoxy, alkyl, alkylcarbonyl, alkylester, alkyl-O-C(O)-, alkyl-heterocyclyl, alkyl-cycloalkyl, alkyl-nitrile, alkynyl, amido groups, amino, aminoalkyl, aminocarbonyl, carbonitrile, carbonylalkoxy, carboxamido, -CF3, -CN, -C(O)OH, -C(O)H, -C(O)-C(CH3)3, -OH, -C(O)O-alkyl, -C(O)O- cycloalkyl, -C(O)O-heterocyclyl, -C(O)-alkyl, -C(O)-cycloalkyl, -C(O)-heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, dialkylaminoalkoxy, dialkylaminocarbonylalkoxy, dialkylaminocarbonyl, halogen, heterocyclyl, a heterocycloalkyl group, heterocyclyloxy, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, nitro, -OCF3, oxo, phenyl, - SO2CH3, -SO2CR3, tetrazolyl, thienylalkoxy, trifluoromethylcarbonylamino, trifluoromethylsulfonamido, heterocyclylalkoxy, heterocyclyl-S(O)p, cycloalkyl-S(O)p, alkyl-S-, heterocyclyl-S, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycolthio, cycloalkylthio, -Z105-C(O)N(R)2, -Z105-N(R)-C(O)-Z200, -Z105-N(R)-S(O)2-Z200, -ZI05-N(R)-C(O)-N(R)-Z200, -N(R) -C(O)R, -N(R)- C(O)OR, OR-C(O)-heterocyclyl-OR, R0 and -CH2OR0; wherein R is Ci-C4 alkyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl or phenyl; wherein p is O, 1 or 2; where R0 for each occurrence is independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, -(Ci-C6)-NRdRe, -E-(CH2),-NRdRe, -E-(CH2)t-O-alkyl, -E-(CH2)t-S-alkyl, or -E-(CH2)t-0H; wherein t is an integer from 1 to 6;
Z105 for each occurrence is independently a covalent bond, alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl; and Z200 for each occurrence is independently selected from an optionally substituted group selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, phenyl, alkyl-phenyl, alkenyl-phenyl or alkynyl-phenyl; E is a direct bond, O, S, S(O), S(O)2, or NRf, wherein Rf is H or alkyl and R0 and R6 are independently H, alkyl, alkanoyl or SO2-aIkyl; or Ra, Re and the nitrogen atom to which they are attached together to form a five- or six-membered heterocyclic ring.
An "heterocycloalkyl" group, as used herein, is a heterocyclic group that is linked to a compound by an aliphatic group having from one to eight carbon atoms. For example, a preferred heterocycloalkyl group is a morpholinomethyl group.
As used herein, "aliphatic" or "an aliphatic group" or notations such as "(Ci-C20)" include straight chained or branched hydrocarbons which are completely saturated or which contain one or more units of unsaturation, and, thus, includes alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl and hydrocarbons comprising a mixture of single, double and triple bonds. When the group is a C0 it means that the moiety is not present or in other words, it is a bond. As used herein, "alkyl" means C]-C20 and includes straight chained or branched hydrocarbons, which are completely saturated. Preferred alkyls are methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, etc. up to twenty carbon atoms, and isomers thereof. As used herein, "alkenyl" and "alkynyl" means C2-C20 and includes straight chained or branched hydrocarbons which contain one or more units of unsaturation, one or more double bonds for alkenyl and one or more triple bonds for alkynyl.
As used herein, aromatic groups (or aryl groups) include aromatic carbocyclic ring systems (e.g., phenyl and cyclopentyldienyl) and fused polycyclic aromatic ring systems (e.g., naphthyl, biphenylenyl and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthyl).
As used herein, "cycloalkyl" means C3-C2O monocyclic or multicyclic (e.g., bicyclic, tricyclic, etc.) hydrocarbons that is completely saturated or has one or more unsaturated bonds but does not amount to an aromatic group. Preferred examples of a cycloalkyl group are cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl and cyclohexenyl.
As used herein, the term "phosphate" means -R-O-P(=O)(OH)(OH), the term "phosphonate" means -R-P(=O)(OH)(OH) wherein R is not O or S.
As used herein, the term "aryl substituted alkyl" or "aryl substituted alkenyl" means moieties such as methylphenyl, ethylphenyl, methylnaphthyl, ethylnapthyl, ethylenylphenyl ethylenylnaphthyl and so on wherein the alkyl portion of the moiety ranges from 1 to 20 carbons and the alkenyl portion of the moiety ranges from 2 to 20 carbons.
As used herein, the term "heteroaryl substituted alkyl" means moieties such as methylpyridinyl, ethylpyridinyl and so on wherein the alkyl portion of the moiety ranges from 1 to 20 carbons and the heteroaryl can be any heteroaryl. As used herein, many moieties or substituents are termed as being either "substituted" or
"optionally substituted". When a moiety is modified by one of these terms, unless otherwise noted, it denotes that any portion of the moiety that is known to one skilled in the art as being available for substitution can be substituted, which includes one or more substituents, where if more than one substituent then each substituent is independently selected. Such means for substitution are well- known in the art and/or taught by the instant disclosure. For purposes of exemplification, which should not be construed as limiting the scope of this invention, some examples of groups that are substituents are: alkenyl groups, alkoxy group (which itself can be substituted, such as -0-(Ci- C6)alkyl-OR, -O-(Ci-C6)alky 1-N(R)2, and -OCF3), alkoxyalkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylpiperidinyl-alkoxy, alkyl groups (which itself can also be substituted, such as -Q- C6-alkyl-OR, -C1 -Q-alky 1-N(R)2, and -CF3), alkylamino, alkylcarbonyl, alkylester, alkylnitrile, alkylsulfonyl, amino, aminoalkoxy, -CF3, -COH, -COOH, -CN, cycloalkyl, dialkylamino, dialkylaminoalkoxy, dialkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocarbonylalkoxy, dialkylaminosulfonyl, esters (-C(O)-OR, where R is groups such as alkyl, heterocycloalkyl (which can be substituted), heterocyclyl, etc., which can be substituted), halogen or halo group (F, Cl, Br, I), hydroxy, morpholinoalkoxy, morpholinoalkyl, nitro, oxo, -OCF3, optionally substituted phenyl, -S(O)2CH3, -S(O)2CF3 and sulfonyl, N-alkylamino or N,N-dialkylamino (in which the alkyl groups can also be substituted).
The compounds according to the invention may be prepared following synthesis schemes set forth in detail in the Examples below. Methods of Use
The present invention provides compounds described by general Formula I which are effective as antagonists or agonists of the G protein-coupled SlP receptor family. These compounds reduce the number of circulating and infiltrating T- and B-lymphocytes, affording a beneficial immunosuppressive effect.
The present invention also provides compounds that exhibit activity within the SlP receptor family. In a related aspect the invention provides a method for modulating receptors of the SlP family in a human subject suffering from a disorder in which modulation of SlP activity is beneficial, comprising administering to the human subject a compound of Formula I such that modulation of SlP activity in the human subject is triggered and treatment is achieved.
In another related aspect the invention provides a method of modulating sphingosine-1- phosphate receptor 1 (SlPi) activity comprising contacting a cell with one or more compounds of Formula I.
A compound of Formula I or a salt thereof or pharmaceutical compositions containing a therapeutically effective amount thereof is useful in the treatment of a disorder selected from the group comprising CNS system disorders, arthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, juvenile chronic arthritis, Lyme arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, reactive arthritis, and septic arthritis, spondyloarthropathy, systemic lupus erythematosus, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, inflammatory bowel disease, insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, thyroiditis, asthma, allergic diseases, psoriasis, dermatitis scleroderma, graft versus host disease, organ transplant rejection (including but not limited to bone marrow and solid organ rejection), acute or chronic immune disease associated with organ transplantation, sarcoidosis, atherosclerosis, disseminated intravascular coagulation, Kawasaki's disease, Grave's disease, nephrotic syndrome, chronic fatigue syndrome, Wegener's granulomatosis, Henoch-Schoenlein purpurea, microscopic vasculitis of the kidneys, chronic active hepatitis, uveitis, septic shock, toxic shock syndrome, sepsis syndrome, cachexia, infectious diseases, parasitic diseases, acquired immunodeficiency syndrome, acute transverse myelitis, Huntington's chorea, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease, stroke, primary biliary cirrhosis, hemolytic anemia, malignancies, heart failure, myocardial infarction, Addison's disease, sporadic, polyglandular deficiency type I and polyglandular deficiency type II, Schmidt's syndrome, adult (acute) respiratory distress syndrome, alopecia, alopecia areata, seronegative arthopathy, arthropathy, Reiter's disease, psoriatic arthropathy, ulcerative colitic arthropathy, enteropathic synovitis, chlamydia, yersinia and salmonella associated arthropathy, atheromatous disease/arteriosclerosis, atopic allergy, autoimmune bullous disease, pemphigus vulgaris, pemphigus foliaceus, pemphigoid, linear IgA disease, autoimmune haemolytic anaemia, Coombs positive haemolytic anaemia, acquired pernicious anaemia, juvenile pernicious anaemia, myalgic encephalitis/Royal Free Disease, chronic mucocutaneous candidiasis, giant cell arteritis, primary sclerosing hepatitis, cryptogenic autoimmune hepatitis, Acquired Immunodeficiency Disease Syndrome, Acquired Immunodeficiency Related Diseases, Hepatitis B, Hepatitis C, common varied immunodeficiency (common variable hypogammaglobulinaemia), dilated cardiomyopathy, female infertility, ovarian failure, premature ovarian failure, fibrotic lung disease, chronic wound healing, cryptogenic fibrosing alveolitis, post-inflammatory interstitial lung disease, interstitial pneumonitis, connective tissue disease associated interstitial lung disease, mixed connective tissue disease associated lung disease, systemic sclerosis associated interstitial lung disease, rheumatoid arthritis associated interstitial lung disease, systemic lupus erythematosus associated lung disease, dermatomyositis/polymyositis associated lung disease, Sjogren's disease associated lung disease, ankylosing spondylitis associated lung disease, vasculitic diffuse lung disease, haemosiderosis associated lung disease, drug-induced interstitial lung disease, radiation fibrosis, bronchiolitis obliterans, chronic eosinophilic pneumonia, lymphocytic infiltrative lung disease, postinfectious interstitial lung disease, gouty arthritis, autoimmune hepatitis, type-1 autoimmune hepatitis (classical autoimmune or lupoid hepatitis), type-2 autoimmune hepatitis (anti-LKM antibody hepatitis), autoimmune mediated hypoglycaemia, type B insulin resistance with acanthosis nigricans, hypoparathyroidism, acute immune disease associated with organ transplantation, chronic immune disease associated with organ transplantation, osteoarthrosis, primary sclerosing cholangitis, psoriasis type 1, psoriasis type 2, idiopathic leucopaenia, autoimmune neutropaenia, renal disease NOS, glomerulonephritides, microscopic vasulitis of the kidneys, Lyme disease, discoid lupus erythematosus, male infertility idiopathic or NOS, sperm autoimmunity, multiple sclerosis (all subtypes), sympathetic ophthalmia, pulmonary hypertension secondary to connective tissue disease, Goodpasture's syndrome, pulmonary manifestation of polyarteritis nodosa, acute rheumatic fever, rheumatoid spondylitis, Still's disease, systemic sclerosis, Sjogren's syndrome, Takayasu's disease/arteritis, autoimmune thrombocytopaenia, idiopathic thrombocytopaenia, autoimmune thyroid disease, hyperthyroidism, goitrous autoimmune hypothyroidism (Hashimoto's disease), atrophic autoimmune hypothyroidism, primary myxoedema, phacogenic uveitis, primary vasculitis, vitiligo, acute liver disease, chronic liver diseases, alcoholic cirrhosis, alcohol-induced liver injury, choleosatatis, idiosyncratic liver disease, Drug-Induced hepatitis, Non-alcoholic Steatohepatitis, allergy and asthma, group B streptococci (GBS) infection, mental disorders (e.g., depression and schizophrenia), Th2 Type and ThI Type mediated diseases, acute and chronic pain (different forms of pain), neuropathic pain and cancers such as lung, breast, stomach, bladder, colon, pancreas, ovarian, prostate and rectal cancer and hematopoietic malignancies (leukemia and lymphoma), and hematopoietic malignancies (leukemia and lymphoma), Abetalipoprotemia, Acrocyanosis, acute and chronic parasitic or infectious processes, acute leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL), acute myeloid leukemia (AML), acute or chronic bacterial infection, acute pancreatitis, acute renal failure, adenocarcinomas, aerial ectopic beats, ADDS dementia complex, alcohol-induced hepatitis, allergic conjunctivitis, allergic contact dermatitis, allergic rhinitis, allograft rejection, α-1- antitrypsin deficiency, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, anemia, angina pectoris, anterior horn cell degeneration, anti cd3 therapy, antiphospholipid syndrome, anti-receptor hypersensitivity reactions, aordic and peripheral aneuryisms, aortic dissection, arterial hypertension, arteriosclerosis, arteriovenous fistula, ataxia, atrial fibrillation (sustained or paroxysmal), atrial flutter, atrioventricular block, B cell lymphoma, bone graft rejection, bone marrow transplant (BMT) rejection, bundle branch block, Burkitt's lymphoma, Burns, cardiac arrhythmias, cardiac stun syndrome, cardiac tumors, cardiomyopathy, cardiopulmonary bypass inflammation response, cartilage transplant rejection, cerebellar cortical degenerations, cerebellar disorders, chaotic or multifocal atrial tachycardia, chemotherapy associated disorders, chromic myelocytic leukemia (CML), chronic alcoholism, chronic inflammatory pathologies, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), chronic salicylate intoxication, colorectal carcinoma, congestive heart failure, conjunctivitis, contact dermatitis, cor pulmonale, coronary artery disease, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, culture negative sepsis, cystic fibrosis, cytokine therapy associated disorders, Dementia pugilistica, demyelinating diseases, dengue hemorrhagic fever, dermatitis, dermatologic conditions, diabetes, diabetes mellitus, diabetic aterosclerotic disease, Diffuse Lewy body disease, dilated congestive cardiomyopathy, disorders of the basal ganglia, Down's Syndrome in middle age, drug- induced movement disorders induced by drugs which block CNS dopamine receptors, drug sensitivity, eczema, encephalomyelitis, endocarditis, endocrinopathy, epiglottitis, epstein-barr virus infection, erythromelalgia, extrapyramidal and cerebellar disorders, familial hematophagocytic lymphohistiocytosis, fetal thymus implant rejection, Friedreich's ataxia, functional peripheral arterial disorders, fungal sepsis, gas gangrene, gastric ulcer, glomerular nephritis, graft rejection of any organ or tissue, gram negative sepsis, gram positive sepsis, granulomas due to intracellular organisms, hairy cell leukemia, Hallerrorden-Spatz disease, hashimoto's thyroiditis, hay fever, heart transplant rejection, hemachromatosis, hemodialysis, hemolytic uremic syndrome/thrombolytic thrombocytopenic purpura, hemorrhage, hepatitis (A), His bundle arrythmias, HIV infection/HTV neuropathy, Hodgkin's disease, hyperkinetic movement disorders, hypersensitity reactions, hypersensitivity pneumonitis, hypertension, hypokinetic movement disorders, hypothalamic- pituitary-adrenal axis evaluation, idiopathic Addison's disease, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, antibody mediated cytotoxicity, Asthenia, infantile spinal muscular atrophy, inflammation of the aorta, influenza a, ionizing radiation exposure, iridocyclitis/uveitis/optic neuritis, ischemia- reperfusion injury, ischemic stroke, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, juvenile spinal muscular atrophy, Kaposi's sarcoma, kidney transplant rejection, legionella, leishmaniasis, leprosy, lesions of the corticospinal system, lipedema, liver transplant rejection, lymphederma, malaria, malignamt Lymphoma, malignant histiocytosis, malignant melanoma, meningitis, meningococcemia, metabolic/idiopathic, migraine headache, mitochondrial multisystem disorder, mixed connective tissue disease, monoclonal gammopathy, multiple myeloma, multiple systems degenerations (Mencel Dejerine- Thomas Shi-Drager and Machado-Joseph), myasthenia gravis, mycobacterium avium intracellulare, mycobacterium tuberculosis, myelodyplastic syndrome, myocardial infarction, myocardial ischemic disorders, nasopharyngeal carcinoma, neonatal chronic lung disease, nephritis, nephrosis, neurodegenerative diseases, neurogenic I muscular atrophies, neutropenic fever, non- hodgkins lymphoma, occlusion of the abdominal aorta and its branches, occulsive arterial disorders, orchitis/epidydimitis, orchitis/vasectomy reversal procedures, organomegaly, osteoporosis, pancreas transplant rejection, pancreatic carcinoma, paraneoplastic syndrome/hypercalcemia of malignancy, parathyroid transplant rejection, pelvic inflammatory disease, perennial rhinitis, pericardial disease, peripheral atherlosclerotic disease, peripheral vascular disorders, peritonitis, pernicious anemia, Pneumocystis carinii pneumonia, pneumonia, POEMS syndrome (polyneuropathy, organomegaly, endocrinopathy, monoclonal gammopathy, and skin changes syndrome), post perfusion syndrome, post pump syndrome, post-MI cardiotomy syndrome, preeclampsia, Progressive supranucleo Palsy, primary pulmonary hypertension, radiation therapy, Raynaud's phenomenon and disease, Raynoud's disease, Refsum's disease, regular narrow QRS tachycardia, renovascular hypertension, reperfusion injury, restrictive cardiomyopathy, sarcomas, scleroderma, senile chorea, Senile Dementia of Lewy body type, seronegative arthropathies, shock, sickle cell anemia, skin allograft rejection, skin changes syndrome, small bowel transplant rejection, solid tumors, specific arrythmias, spinal ataxia, spinocerebellar degenerations, streptococcal myositis, structural lesions of the cerebellum, Subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, Syncope, syphilis of the cardiovascular system, systemic anaphalaxis, systemic inflammatory response syndrome, systemic onset juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, T-cell or FAB ALL, Telangiectasia, thromboangitis obliterans, thrombocytopenia, toxicity, transplants, trauma/hemorrhage, type III hypersensitivity reactions, type IV hypersensitivity, unstable angina, uremia, urosepsis, urticaria, valvular heart diseases, varicose veins, vasculitis, venous diseases, venous thrombosis, ventricular fibrillation, viral and fungal infections, vital encephalitis/aseptic meningitis, vital-associated hemaphagocytic syndrome, Wernicke- Korsakoff syndrome, Wilson's disease, xenograft rejection of any organ or tissue, and diseases involving inappropriate vascularization for example diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, choroidal neovascularization due to age-related macular degeneration, and infantile hemangiomas in human beings. In addition, such compounds may be useful in the treatment of disorders such as, edema, ascites, effusions, and exudates, including for example macular edema, cerebral edema, acute lung injury, adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), proliferative disorders such as restenosis, fibrotic disorders such as hepatic cirrhosis and atherosclerosis, mesangial cell proliferative disorders such as glomerulonephritis, diabetic nephropathy, malignant nephrosclerosis, thrombotic microangiopathy syndromes, and glomerulopathies, myocardial angiogenesis, coronary and cerebral collaterals, ischemic limb angiogenesis, ischemia/reperfusion injury, peptic ulcer Helicobacter related diseases, virally-induced angiogenic disorders, Crow-Fukase syndrome (POEMS), preeclampsia, menometrorrhagia, cat scratch fever, rubeosis, neovascular glaucoma and retinopathies such as those associated with diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, age- related macular degeneration or a central nervous system disorder. In addition, these compounds can be used as active agents against solid tumors, malignant ascites, von Hippel Lindau disease, hematopoietic cancers and hyperproliferative disorders such as thyroid hyperplasia (especially Grave's disease), and cysts (such as hypervascularity of ovarian stroma characteristic of polycystic ovarian syndrome (Stein-Leventhal syndrome) and polycystic kidney disease since such diseases require a proliferation of blood vessel cells for growth and/or metastasis. Combination Therapy
Compounds of Formula I of the invention can be used alone or in combination with another therapeutic agent to treat such diseases. It should be understood that the compounds of the invention can be used alone or in combination with an additional agent, e.g., a therapeutic agent, said additional agent being selected by the skilled artisan for its intended purpose. For example, the additional agent can be a therapeutic agent art-recognized as being useful to treat the disease or condition being treated by the compound of the present invention. The additional agent also can be an agent that imparts a beneficial attribute to the therapeutic composition e.g., an agent that affects the viscosity of the composition.
It should further be understood that the combinations which are to be included within this invention are those combinations useful for their intended purpose. The agents set forth below are illustrative for purposes and not intended to be limited. The combinations, which are part of this invention, can be the compounds of the present invention and at least one additional agent selected from the lists below. The combination can also include more than one additional agent, e.g., two or three additional agents if the combination is such that the formed composition can perform its intended function.
Preferred combinations are non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug(s) also referred to as NSAIDS which include drugs like ibuprofen. Other preferred combinations are corticosteroids including prednisolone; the well known side-effects of steroid use can be reduced or even eliminated by tapering the steroid dose required when treating patients in combination with the SlP receptor agonists or antagonists of this invention. Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for rheumatoid arthritis with which a compound of Formula I of the invention can be combined include the following: cytokine suppressive anti-inflammatory drug(s) (CSAIDs); antibodies to or antagonists of other human cytokines or growth factors, for example, TNF, LT, IL-I, IL-2, IL-3, IL- 4, IL-5, IL-6, DL-7, IL-8, IL-12, IL-15, IL-16, IL-21, IL-23, interferons, EMAP-II, GM-CSF, FGF, and PDGF. S/T kinase inhibitors of the invention can be combined with antibodies to cell surface molecules such as CD2, CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, CD28, CD30, CD40, CD45, CD69, CD80 (B7.1), CD86 (B7.2), CD90, CTLA or their ligands including CD154 (gp39 or CD40L).
Preferred combinations of therapeutic agents may interfere at different points in the autoimmune and subsequent inflammatory cascade; preferred examples include TNF antagonists like chimeric, humanized or human TNF antibodies, HUMIRA™, (U.S. Patent No. US 6,090,382), CA2 (REMICADE™), CDP 571, and soluble p55 or p75 TNF receptors, derivatives, thereof, (p75TNFRlgG (ENBREL™) or p55TNFRlgG (Lenercept), and also TNFα converting enzyme (TACE) inhibitors; similarly IL-I inhibitors (Interleukin-1 -converting enzyme inhibitors, DL-IRA etc.) may be effective for the same reason. Other preferred combinations include Interleukin 11. Yet other preferred combinations are the other key players of the autoimmune response which may act parallel to, dependent on or in concert with IL-18 function; especially preferred are EL-12 antagonists including IL-12 antibodies or soluble IL-12 receptors, or IL-12 binding proteins. It has been shown that IL-12 and IL-18 have overlapping but distinct functions and a combination of antagonists to both may be most effective. Yet another preferred combination are non-depleting anti-CD4 inhibitors. Yet other preferred combinations include antagonists of the co-stimulatory pathway CD80 (B7.1) or CD86 (B7.2) including antibodies, soluble receptors or antagonistic ligands.
A compound of Formula I of the invention may also be combined with agents, such as methotrexate, 6-MP, azathioprine sulphasalazine, mesalazine, olsalazine chloroquinine/ hydroxychloroquine, pencillamine, aurothiomalate (intramuscular and oral), azathioprine, cochicine, corticosteroids (oral, inhaled and local injection), beta-2 adrenoreceptor agonists (salbutamol, terbutaline, salmeteral), xanthines (theophylline, aminophylline), cromoglycate, nedocromil, ketotifen, ipratropium and oxitropium, cyclosporin, FK506, rapamycin, mycophenolate mofetil, leflunomide, NSADDs, for example, ibuprofen, corticosteroids such as prednisolone, phosphodiesterase inhibitors, adensosine agonists, antithrombotic agents, complement inhibitors, adrenergic agents, agents which interfere with signalling by proinflammatory cytokines such as TNFα or IL-I (e.g. IRAK, NIK, IKK , p38 or MAP kinase inhibitors), IL-lβ converting enzyme inhibitors, T-cell signalling inhibitors such as kinase inhibitors, metalloproteinase inhibitors, sulfasalazine, 6-mercaptopurines, angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors, soluble cytokine receptors and derivatives thereof (e.g. soluble p55 or p75 TNF receptors and the derivatives p75TNFRIgG (Enbrel™ and p55TNFRIgG (Lenercept)), sDL-lRI, sIL-lRII, sIL-6R), antiinflammatory cytokines (e.g. IL-4, IL-10, IL-I l, IL-13 and TGFβ), celecoxib, folic acid, hydroxychloroquine sulfate, rofecoxib, etanercept, infliximab, naproxen, valdecoxib, sulfasalazine, methylprednisolone, meloxicam, methylprednisolone acetate, gold sodium thiomalate, aspirin, triamcinolone acetonide, propoxyphene napsylate/apap, folate, nabumetone, diclofenac, piroxicam, etodolac, diclofenac sodium, oxaprozin, oxycodone HCl, hydrocodone bitartrate/apap, diclofenac sodium/misoprostol, fentanyl, anakinra, tramadol HCl, salsalate, sulindac, cyanocobalamin/fa/pyridoxine, acetaminophen, alendronate sodium, prednisolone, morphine sulfate, lidocaine hydrochloride, indomethacin, glucosamine sulf/chondroitin, amitriptyline HCl, sulfadiazine, oxycodone HCl/acetaminophen, olopatadine HCl misoprostol, naproxen sodium, omeprazole, cyclophosphamide, rituximab, IL-I TRAP, MRA, CTLA4-IG, IL-18 BP, anti-IL-12, Anti-IL15, BIRB-796, SCIO-469, VX-702, AMG-548, VX-740, Roflumilast, IC-485, CDC-801, and Mesopram. Preferred combinations include methotrexate or leflunomide and in moderate or severe rheumatoid arthritis cases, cyclosporine and anti-TNF antibodies as noted above. Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for inflammatory bowel disease with which a compound of Formula I of the invention can be combined include the following: budenoside; epidermal growth factor; corticosteroids; cyclosporin, sulfasalazine; aminosalicylates; 6- mercaptopurine; azathioprine; metronidazole; lipoxygenase inhibitors; mesalamine; olsalazine; balsalazide; antioxidants; thromboxane inhibitors; IL-I receptor antagonists; anti-EL-lβ monoclonal antibodies; anti-IL-6 monoclonal antibodies; growth factors; elastase inhibitors; pyridinyl-imidazole compounds; antibodies to or antagonists of other human cytokines or growth factors, for example, TNF, LT, IL-I, IL-2, IL-6, EL-7, IL-8, IL-12, IL-15, IL-16, EMAP-II, GM-CSF, FGF, and PDGF; cell surface molecules such as CD2, CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, CD28, CD30, CD40, CD45, CD69, CD90 or their ligands; methotrexate; cyclosporine; FK506; rapamycin; mycophenolate mofetil; leflunomide; NSAIDs, for example, ibuprofen; corticosteroids such as prednisolone; phosphodiesterase inhibitors; adenosine agonists; antithrombotic agents; complement inhibitors; adrenergic agents; agents which interfere with signalling by proinflammatory cytokines such as TNFα or IL-I (e.g., IRAK, NIK, IKK, or MAP kinase inhibitors); IL-lβ converting enzyme inhibitors; TNFα converting enzyme inhibitors; T-cell signalling inhibitors such as kinase inhibitors; metal loproteinase inhibitors; sulfasalazine; azathioprine; 6-mercaptopurines; angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors; soluble cytokine receptors and derivatives thereof (e.g., soluble p55 or p75 TNF receptors, sIL-lRI, sIL-lRII, sIL-6R) and antiinflammatory cytokines (e.g., IL-4, IL- 10, EL-I l, EL-13 and TGFβ). Preferred examples of therapeutic agents for Crohn's disease with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: TNF antagonists, for example, anti-TNF antibodies, HUMIRA™ ,U.S. Patent No. US 6,090,382;, CA2 (REMICADE™), CDP 571, TNFR-Ig constructs, (p75TNFRIgG (ENBRELTM) and p55TNFRIgG (Lenercept™)) inhibitors and PDE4 inhibitors. A compound of Formula I can be combined with corticosteroids, for example, budenoside and dexamethasone; sulfasalazine, 5-aminosalicylic acid; olsalazine; and agents which interfere with synthesis or action of proinflammatory cytokines such as EL-I, for example, EL-lβ converting enzyme inhibitors and EL-lra; T cell signaling inhibitors, for example, tyrosine kinase inhibitors 6-mercaptopurines; EL-I l; mesalamine; prednisone; azathioprine; mercaptopurine; infliximab; methylprednisolone sodium succinate; diphenoxylate/atrop sulfate; loperamide hydrochloride; methotrexate; omeprazole; folate; ciprofloxacin/dextrose-water; hydrocodone bitartrate/apap; tetracycline hydrochloride; fluocinonide; metronidazole; thimerosal/boric acid; cholestyramine/sucrose; ciprofloxacin hydrochloride; hyoscyamine sulfate; meperidine hydrochloride; midazolam hydrochloride; oxycodone HCl/acetaminophen; promethazine hydrochloride; sodium phosphate; sulfamethoxazole/trimethoprim; celecoxib; polycarbophil; propoxyphene napsylate; hydrocortisone; multivitamins; balsalazide disodium; codeine phosphate/apap; colesevelam HCl; cyanocobalamin; folic acid; levofloxacin; methylprednisolone; natalizumab and interferon-gamma. Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for multiple sclerosis with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: corticosteroids; prednisolone; methylprednisolone; azathioprine; cyclophosphamide; cyclosporine; methotrexate; 4- aminopyridine; tizanidine; interferon-βla (Avonex®; Biogen); interferon-βlb (Betaseron®; Chiron/Berlex); interferon α-n3) (Interferon Sciences/Fujimoto), interferon-α (Alfa Wassermann/J&J), interferon β IA-IF (Serono/Inhale Therapeutics), Peginterferon α 2b (Enzon/Schering-Plough), Copolymer 1 (Cop-1; Copaxone®; Teva Pharmaceutical Industries, Inc.); hyperbaric oxygen; intravenous immunoglobulin; clabribine; antibodies to or antagonists of other human cytokines or growth factors and their receptors, for example, TNF, LT, DL-I, DL-2, IL-6, DL- 7, IL-8, IL- 12, IL-23, IL-15, IL-16, EMAP-II, GM-CSF, FGF, and PDGF. A compound of Formula I can be combined with antibodies to cell surface molecules such as CD2, CD3, CD4, CD8, CD 19, CD20, CD25, CD28, CD30, CD40, CD45, CD69, CD80, CD86, CD90 or their ligands. A compound of Formula I may also be combined with agents such as methotrexate, cyclosporine, FK506, rapamycin, mycophenolate mofetil, leflunomide, NSAIDs, for example, ibuprofen, corticosteroids such as prednisolone, phosphodiesterase inhibitors, adensosine agonists, antithrombotic agents, complement inhibitors, adrenergic agents, agents which interfere with signalling by proinflammatory cytokines such as TNFα or DL-I (e.g. KAK, NIK, IKK, p38 or MAP kinase inhibitors), DL-lβ converting enzyme inhibitors, TACE inhibitors, T-cell signaling inhibitors such as kinase inhibitors, metalloproteinase inhibitors, sulfasalazine, azathioprine, 6- mercaptopurines, angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors, soluble cytokine receptors and derivatives thereof (e.g., soluble p55 or p75 TNF receptors, sIL-lRI, sIL-lRII, sIL-6R) and antiinflammatory cytokines (e.g. DL-4, DL-IO, IL-13 and TGFβ).
Preferred examples of therapeutic agents for multiple sclerosis in which a compound of Formula I can be combined to include interferon-β, for example, EFNβla and DFNβlb; Copaxone, corticosteroids, caspase inhibitors, for example inhibitors of caspase-1, EL-I inhibitors, TNF inhibitors, and antibodies to CD40 ligand and CD80.
A compound of Formula I may also be combined with agents, such as alemtuzumab, dronabinol, daclizumab, mitoxantrone, xaliproden hydrochloride, fampridine, glatiramer acetate, natalizumab, sinnabidol, a-immunokine NNSO3, ABR-215062, AnergiX.MS, chemokine receptor antagonists, BBR-2778, calagualine, CPI-1189, LEM (liposome encapsulated mitoxantrone), THCCBD (cannabinoid agonist), MBP-8298, mesopram (PDE4 inhibitor), MNA-715, anti-IL-6 receptor antibody, neurovax, pirfenidone allotrap 1258 (RDP-1258), sTNF-Rl, talampanel, teriflunomide, TGF-beta2, tiplimotide, VLA-4 antagonists (for example, TR-14035, VLA4 Ultrahaler, Antegran-ELAN/Biogen), interferon gamma antagonists and IL-4 agonists. Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for angina with which a compound of Formula
I of the invention can be combined include the following: aspirin, nitroglycerin, isosorbide mononitrate, metoprolol succinate, atenolol, metoprolol tartrate, amlodipine besylate, diltiazem hydrochloride, isosorbide dinitrate, clopidogrel bisulfate, nifedipine, atorvastatin calcium, potassium chloride, furosemide, simvastatin, verapamil HCl, digoxin, propranolol hydrochloride, carvedilol, lisinopril, spironolactone, hydrochlorothiazide, enalapril maleate, nadolol, ramipril, enoxaparin sodium, heparin sodium, valsartan, sotalol hydrochloride, fenofibrate, ezetimibe, bumetanide, losartan potassium, lisinopril/hydrochlorothiazide, felodipine, captopril and bisoprolol fumarate.
Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for ankylosing spondylitis with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: ibuprofen, diclofenac, misoprostol, naproxen, meloxicam, indomethacin, diclofenac, celecoxib, rofecoxib, sulfasalazine, methotrexate, azathioprine, minocyclin, prednisone, etanercept, and infliximab. Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for asthma with which a compound of Formula
I can be combined include the following: albuterol, salmeterol/fluticasone, montelukast sodium, fluticasone propionate, budesonide, prednisone, salmeterol xinafoate, levalbuterol HCl, albuterol sulfate/ipratropium, prednisolone sodium phosphate, triamcinolone acetonide, beclomethasone dipropionate, ipratropium bromide, azithromycin, pirbuterol acetate, prednisolone, theophylline anhydrous, methylprednisolone sodium succinate, clarithromycin, zafirlukast, formoterol fumarate, influenza virus vaccine, amoxicillin trihydrate, flunisolide, allergy injection, cromolyn sodium, fexofenadine hydrochloride, flunisolide/menthol, amoxicillin/clavulanate, levofloxacin, inhaler assist device, guaifenesin, dexamethasone sodium phosphate, moxifloxacin HCl, doxycycline hyclate, guaifenesin/d-methorphan, p-ephedrine/cod/chlorphenir, gatifloxacin, cetirizine hydrochloride, mometasone furoate, salmeterol xinafoate, benzonatate, cephalexin, pe/hydrocodone/chlorphenir, cetirizine HCl/pseudoephed, phenylephrine/cod/promethazine, codeine/promethazine, cefprozil, dexamethasone, guaifenesin/pseudoephedrine, chlorpheniramine/hydrocodone, nedocromil sodium, terbutaline sulfate, epinephrine, methylprednisolone and metaproterenol sulfate. Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for COPD with which a compound of Formula
I can be combined include the following: albuterol sulfate/ipratropium, ipratropium bromide, salmeterol/fluticasone, albuterol, salmeterol xinafoate, fluticasone propionate, prednisone, theophylline anhydrous, methylprednisolone sodium succinate, montelukast sodium, budesonide, formoterol fumarate, triamcinolone acetonide, levofloxacin, guaifenesin, azithromycin, beclomethasone dipropionate, levalbuterol HCl, flunisolide, ceftriaxone sodium, amoxicillin trihydrate, gatifloxacin, zafirlukast, amoxicillin/clavulanate, flunisolide/menthol, chlorpheniramine/hydrocodone, metaproterenol sulfate, methylprednisolone, mometasone furoate, p-ephedrine/cod/chlorphenir, pirbuterol acetate, p-ephedrine/loratadine, terbutaline sulfate, tiotropium bromide, (R,R)-formoterol, TgAAT, cilomilast and roflumilast. Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for HCV with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: Interferon-α-2a, Interferon-α-2b, Interferon-α conl, Interferon-α-nl, pegylated interferon-α-2a, pegylated interferon-α-2b, ribavirin, peginterferon alfa- 2b + ribavirin, ursodeoxycholic acid, glycyrrhizic acid, thymalfasin, Maxamine, VX-497 and any compounds that are used to treat HCV through intervention with the following targets: HCV polymerase, HCV protease, HCV helicase, and HCV IRES (internal ribosome entry site).
Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for Idiopathic Pulmonary Fibrosis with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: prednisone, azathioprine, albuterol, colchicine, albuterol sulfate, digoxin, gamma interferon, methylprednisolone sod succ, lorazepam, furosemide, lisinopril, nitroglycerin, spironolactone, cyclophosphamide, ipratropium bromide, actinomycin d, alteplase, fluticasone propionate, levofloxacin, metaproterenol sulfate, morphine sulfate, oxycodone HCl, potassium chloride, triamcinolone acetonide, tacrolimus anhydrous, calcium, interferon-α, methotrexate, mycophenolate mofetil and interferon-gamma-lβ.
Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for myocardial infarction with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: aspirin, nitroglycerin, metoprolol tartrate, enoxaparin sodium, heparin sodium, clopidogrel bisulfate, carvedilol, atenolol, morphine sulfate, metoprolol succinate, warfarin sodium, lisinopril, isosorbide mononitrate, digoxin, furosemide, simvastatin, ramipril, tenecteplase, enalapril maleate, torsemide, retavase, losartan potassium, quinapril HCl/mag carb, bumetanide, alteplase, enalaprilat, amiodarone hydrochloride, tirofiban HCl m-hydrate, diltiazem hydrochloride, captopril, irbesartan, valsartan, propranolol hydrochloride, fosinopril sodium, lidocaine hydrochloride, eptifibatide, cefazolin sodium, atropine sulfate, aminocaproic acid, spironolactone, interferon, sotalol hydrochloride, potassium chloride, docusate sodium, dobutamine HCl, alprazolam, pravastatin sodium, atorvastatin calcium, midazolam hydrochloride, meperidine hydrochloride, isosorbide dinitrate, epinephrine, dopamine hydrochloride, bivalirudin, rosuvastatin, ezetimibe/simvastatin, avasimibe, and cariporide.
Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for psoriasis with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: calcipotriene, clobetasol propionate, triamcinolone acetonide, halobetasol propionate, tazarotene, methotrexate, fluocinonide, betamethasone diprop augmented, fluocinolone acetonide, acitretin, tar shampoo, betamethasone valerate, mometasone furoate, ketoconazole, pramoxine/fluocinolone, hydrocortisone valerate, flurandrenolide, urea, betamethasone, clobetasol propionate/emoll, fluticasone propionate, azithromycin, hydrocortisone, moisturizing formula, folic acid, desonide, pimecrolimus, coal tar, diflorasone diacetate, etanercept folate, lactic acid, methoxsalen, hc/bismuth subgal/znox/resor, methylprednisolone acetate, prednisone, sunscreen, halcinonide, salicylic acid, anthralin, clocortolone pivalate, coal extract, coal tar/salicylic acid, coal tar/salicylic acid/sulfur, desoximetasone, diazepam, emollient, fluocinonide/emollient, mineral oil/castor oil/na lact, mineral oil/peanut oil, petroleum/isopropyl myristate, psoralen, salicylic acid, soap/tribromsalan, thimerosal/boric acid, celecoxib, infliximab, cyclosporine, alefacept, efalizumab, tacrolimus, pimecrolimus, PUVA, UVB, and sulfasalazine. Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for psoriatic arthritis with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: methotrexate, etanercept, rofecoxib, celecoxib, folic acid, sulfasalazine, naproxen, leflunomide, methylprednisolone acetate, indomethacin, hydroxychloroquine sulfate, prednisone, sulindac, betamethasone diprop augmented, infliximab, methotrexate, folate, triamcinolone acetonide, diclofenac, dimethylsulfoxide, piroxicam, diclofenac sodium, ketoprofen, meloxicam, methylprednisolone, nabumetone, tolmetin sodium, calcipotriene, cyclosporine, diclofenac sodium/misoprostol, fluocinonide, glucosamine sulfate, gold sodium thiomalate, hydrocodone bitartrate/apap, ibuprofen, risedronate sodium, sulfadiazine, thioguanine, valdecoxib, alefacept and efalizumab. Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for restenosis with which a compound of
Formula I can be combined include the following: sirolimus, paclitaxel, everolimus, tacrolimus, ABT-578, and acetaminophen.
Non-limiting examples of therapeutic agents for sciatica with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: hydrocodone bitartrate/apap, rofecoxib, cyclobenzaprine HCl, methylprednisolone, naproxen, ibuprofen, oxycodone HCl/acetaminophen, celecoxib, valdecoxib, methylprednisolone acetate, prednisone, codeine phosphate/apap, tramadol hcl/acetaminophen, metaxalone, meloxicam, methocarbamol, lidocaine hydrochloride, diclofenac sodium, gabapentin, dexamethasone, carisoprodol, ketorolac tromethamine, indomethacin, acetaminophen, diazepam, nabumetone, oxycodone HCl, tizanidine HCl, diclofenac sodium/misoprostol, propoxyphene napsylate/apap, asa/oxycod/oxycodone ter, ibuprofen/hydrocodone bit, tramadol HCl, etodolac, propoxyphene HCl, amitriptyline HCl, carisoprodol/codeine phos/asa, morphine sulfate, multivitamins, naproxen sodium, orphenadrine citrate, and temazepam.
Preferred examples of therapeutic agents for SLE (Lupus) with which a compound of Formula I can be combined include the following: NSAEDS, for example, diclofenac, naproxen, ibuprofen, piroxicam, indomethacin; COX2 inhibitors, for example, celecoxib, rofecoxib, valdecoxib; anti-malarials, for example, hydroxychloroquine; steroids, for example, prednisone, prednisolone, budenoside, dexamethasone; cytotoxics, for example, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, mycophenolate mofetil, methotrexate; inhibitors of PDE4 or purine synthesis inhibitor, for example Cellcept®. A compound of Formula I may also be combined with agents such as sulfasalazine, 5-aminosalicylic acid, olsalazine, Imuran® and agents which interfere with synthesis, production or action of proinflammatory cytokines such as IL-I, for example, caspase inhibitors like IL-lβ converting enzyme inhibitors and IL-lra. A compound of Formula I may also be used with T cell signaling inhibitors, for example, tyrosine kinase inhibitors; or molecules that target T cell activation molecules, for example, CTLA-4-IgG or anti-B7 family antibodies, anti-PD- 1 family antibodies. A compound of Formula I can be combined with IL-I l or anti-cytokine antibodies, for example, fonotolizumab (anti-EFNg antibody), or anti-receptor receptor antibodies, for example, anti-IL-6 receptor antibody and antibodies to B-cell surface molecules. A compound of Formula I may also be used with LJP 394 (abetimus), agents that deplete or inactivate B-cells, for example, Rituximab (anti-CD20 antibody), lymphostat-B (anti-BlyS antibody), TNF antagonists, for example, anti-TNF antibodies, HUMIRA™ (U.S. Patent No. US 6,090,382;), CA2 (REMICADE™), CDP 571, TNFR-Ig constructs, (p75TNFRIgG (ENBREL™) and p55TNFRIgG (LENERCEPT™).
In the compositions of the present invention the active compound may, if desired, be associated with other compatible pharmacologically active ingredients. For example, the compounds of this invention can be administered in combination with another therapeutic agent that is known to treat a disease or condition described herein. For example, with one or more additional pharmaceutical agents that inhibit or prevent the production of VEGF or angiopoietins, attenuate intracellular responses to VEGF or angiopoietins, block intracellular signal transduction, inhibit vascular hyperpermeability, reduce inflammation, or inhibit or prevent the formation of edema or neovascularization. The compounds of the invention can be administered prior to, subsequent to or simultaneously with the additional pharmaceutical agent, whichever course of administration is appropriate. The additional pharmaceutical agents include, but are not limited to, anti-edemic steroids, NSAIDS, ras inhibitors, anti-TNF agents, anti-ILl agents, antihistamines, PAF- antagonists, COX-I inhibitors, COX-2 inhibitors, NO synthase inhibitors, Akt/PTB inhibitors, IGF- IR inhibitors, PKC inhibitors, PB kinase inhibitors, calcineurin inhibitors and immunosuppressants. The compounds of the invention and the additional pharmaceutical agents act either additively or synergistically. Thus, the administration of such a combination of substances that inhibit angiogenesis, vascular hyperpermeability and/or inhibit the formation of edema can provide greater relief from the deletrious effects of a hyperproliferative disorder, angiogenesis, vascular hyperpermeability or edema than the administration of either substance alone. In the treatment of malignant disorders combinations with antiproliferative or cytotoxic chemotherapies or radiation are included in the scope of the present invention.
One or more compounds of the invention can be administered to a human patient by themselves or in pharmaceutical compositions where they are mixed with biologically suitable carriers or excipient(s) at doses to treat or ameliorate a disease or condition as described herein. Mixtures of these compounds can also be administered to the patient as a simple mixture or in suitable formulated pharmaceutical compositions. A therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of the compound or compounds sufficient to result in the prevention or attenuation of a disease or condition as described herein. Techniques for formulation and administration of the compounds of the instant application may be found in references well known to one of ordinary skill in the art, such as "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences," Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA, latest edition. Pharmaceutical Compositions and Modes of Administration
Suitable routes of administration may, for example, include oral, eyedrop, rectal, transmucosal, topical, or intestinal administration; parenteral delivery, including intramuscular, subcutaneous, intramedullary injections, as well as intrathecal, direct intraventricular, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intranasal, or intraocular injections.
Alternatively, one may administer the compound in a local rather than a systemic manner, for example, via injection of the compound directly into an edematous site, often in a depot or sustained release formulation.
Furthermore, one may administer the drug in a targeted drug delivery system, for example, in a liposome coated with endothelial cell-specific antibody.
The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be manufactured in a manner that is itself known, e.g., by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee- making, levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping or lyophilizing processes.
Pharmaceutical compositions for use in accordance with the present invention thus may be formulated in a conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers comprising excipients and auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. Proper formulation is dependent upon the route of administration chosen.
For injection, the agents of the invention may be formulated in aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks' solution, Ringer's solution, or physiological saline buffer. For transmucosal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
For oral administration, the compounds can be formulated readily by combining the active compounds with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers well known in the art. Such carriers enable the compounds of the invention to be formulated as tablets, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions and the like, for oral ingestion by a patient to be treated.
Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained by combining the active compound with a solid excipient, optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores. Suitable excipients are, in particular, fillers such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; cellulose preparations such as, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, gum tragacanth, methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and/or polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP). If desired, disintegrating agents may be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, or alginic acid or a salt thereof such as sodium alginate. Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings. For this purpose, concentrated sugar solutions may be used, which may optionally contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments may be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for identification or to characterize different combinations of active compound doses.
Pharmaceutical preparations which can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. The push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with filler such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active compounds may be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols. In addition, stabilizers may be added. All formulations for oral administration should be in dosages suitable for such administration.
For buccal administration, the compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner.
For administration by inhalation, the compounds for use according to the present invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoro- methane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas. In the case of pressurized aerosol the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount. Capsules and cartridges of e.g. gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch. The compounds can be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, e.g. bolus injection or continuous infusion. Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g. in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative. The compositions may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents. Pharmaceutical formulations for parenteral administration include aqueous solutions of the active compounds in water-soluble form. Additionally, suspensions of the active compounds may be prepared as appropriate oily injection suspensions. Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes. Aqueous injection suspensions may contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran. Optionally, the suspension may also contain suitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions.
Alternatively, the active ingredient may be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use. The compounds may also be formulated in rectal compositions such as suppositories or retention enemas, e.g., containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides. In addition to the formulations described previously, the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly or by intramuscular injection). Thus, for example, the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
An example of a pharmaceutical carrier for the hydrophobic compounds of the invention is a cosolvent system comprising benzyl alcohol, a nonpolar surfactant, a water-miscible organic polymer, and an aqueous phase. The cosolvent system may be the VPD co-solvent system. VPD is a solution of 3% w/v benzyl alcohol, 8% w/v of the nonpolar surfactant polysorbate 80, and 65% w/v polyethylene glycol 400, made up to volume in absolute ethanol. The VPD co-solvent system (VPD:5W) consists of VPD diluted 1: 1 with a 5% dextrose in water solution. This co-solvent system dissolves hydrophobic compounds well, and itself produces low toxicity upon systemic administration. Naturally, the proportions of a co-solvent system may be varied considerably without destroying its solubility and toxicity characteristics. Furthermore, the identity of the cosolvent components may be varied: for example, other low-toxicity nonpolar surfactants may be used instead of polysorbate 80; the fraction size of polyethylene glycol may be varied; other biocompatible polymers may replace polyethylene glycol, e.g. polyvinyl pyrrolidone; and other sugars or polysaccharides may substitute for dextrose. Alternatively, other delivery systems for hydrophobic pharmaceutical compounds may be employed. Liposomes and emulsions are well known examples of delivery vehicles or carriers for hydrophobic drugs. Certain organic solvents such as dimethysulfoxide also may be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity. Additionally, the compounds may be delivered using a sustained-release system, such as semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the therapeutic agent. Various sustained-release materials have been established and are well known by those skilled in the art. Sustained-release capsules may, depending on their chemical nature, release the compounds for a few weeks up to over 100 days. Depending on the chemical nature and the biological stability of the therapeutic reagent, additional strategies for protein stabilization may be employed. The pharmaceutical compositions also may comprise suitable solid or gel phase carriers or excipients. Examples of such carriers or excipients include but are not limited to calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, and polymers such as polyethylene glycols.
Many of the compounds of the invention may be provided as salts with pharmaceutically compatible counterions. Pharmaceutically compatible salts may be formed with many acids, including but not limited to hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free base forms.
Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for use in the present invention include compositions wherein the active ingredients are contained in an effective amount to achieve its intended purpose. More specifically, a therapeutically effective amount means an amount effective to prevent development of or to alleviate the existing symptoms of the subject being treated. Determination of the effective amounts is well within the capability of those skilled in the art. Dosage
For any compound used in a method of the present invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cellular assays. For example, a dose can be formulated in cellular and animal models to achieve a circulating concentration range that includes the EC50 as determined in cellular assays (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half- maximal inhibition of a given receptor activity). In some cases it is appropriate to determine the EC50 in the presence of 3 to 5% serum albumin since such a determination approximates the binding effects of plasma protein on the compound. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Further, advangtageous compounds for systemic administration effectively modulate receptors of the SlP family in intact cells at levels that are safely achievable in plasma.
A therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of the compound that results in amelioration of symptoms in a patient. Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the maximum tolerated dose (MTD) and the ED50 (effective dose for 50% maximal response). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio between MTD and ED50. Compounds which exhibit high therapeutic indices are preferred. The data obtained from these cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. The exact formulation, route of administration and dosage can be chosen by the individual physician in view of the patient's condition. (See, e.g., Fingl et al, 1975, in "The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics", Ch. 1, p.l). In the treatment of crises, the administration of an acute bolus or an infusion approaching the MTD may be advantageous to obtain a rapid response.
Dosage amount and interval may be adjusted individually to provide plasma levels of the active moiety which are sufficient to modulate receptors of the SlP family, or minimal effective concentration (MEC). The MEC will vary for each compound but can be estimated from in vitro data; e.g. the concentration necessary to achieve 50-90% inhibition of binding of the natural ligand using the assays described herein. Dosages necessary to achieve the MEC will depend on individual characteristics and route of administration. However, HPLC assays or bioassays can be used to determine plasma concentrations.
Dosage intervals can also be determined using the MEC value. Compounds should be administered using a regimen which maintains plasma levels above the MEC for 10-90% of the time, preferably between 30-90% and more preferably between 50-90% until the desired amelioration of symptoms is achieved. In cases of local administration or selective uptake, the effective local concentration of the drug may not be related to plasma concentration.
The amount of composition administered will, of course, be dependent on the subject being treated, on the subject's weight, the severity of the affliction, the manner of administration and the judgment of the prescribing physician.
The compositions may, if desired, be presented in a pack or dispenser device which may contain one or more unit dosage forms containing the active ingredient. The pack may for example comprise metal or plastic foil, such as a blister pack. The pack or dispenser device may be accompanied by instructions for administration. Compositions comprising a compound of the invention formulated in a compatible pharmaceutical carrier may also be prepared, placed in an appropriate container, and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition.
Exemplary Formulations In some formulations it may be beneficial to use the compounds of the present invention in the form of particles of very small size, for example as obtained by fluid energy milling.
The use of compounds of the present invention in the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions is illustrated by the following description. In this description the term "active compound" denotes any compound of the invention but particularly any compound which is the final product of one of the preceding Examples, a) Capsules
In the preparation of capsules, 10 parts by weight of active compound and 240 parts by weight of lactose can be de-aggregated and blended. The mixture can be filled into hard gelatin capsules, each capsule containing a unit dose or part of a unit dose of active compound. b) Tablets
Tablets can be prepared, for example, from the following ingredients:
Parts by weight
Active compound 10
Lactose 190 Maize starch 22
Polyvinylpyrrolidone 10 Magnesium stearate 3
The active compound, the lactose and some of the starch can be de-aggregated, blended and the resulting mixture can be granulated with a solution of the polyvinylpyrrolidone in ethanol. The dry granulate can be blended with the magnesium stearate and the rest of the starch. The mixture is then compressed in a tabletting machine to give tablets each containing a unit dose or a part of a unit dose of active compound. c) Enteric coated tablets
Tablets can be prepared by the method described in (b) above. The tablets can be enteric coated in a conventional manner using a solution of 20% cellulose acetate phthalate and 3% diethyl phthalate in ethanohdichloromethane (1: 1). d) Suppositories
In the preparation of suppositories, for example, 100 parts by weight of active compound can be incorporated in 1300 parts by weight of triglyceride suppository base and the mixture formed into suppositories each containing a therapeutically effective amount of active ingredient. The present invention also comprises the use of a compound of Formula I as a medicament.
A further aspect of the present invention provides the use of a compound of Formula I or a salt thereof in the manufacture of a medicament for treating vascular hyperpermeability, angiogenesis-dependent disorders, proliferative diseases and/or disorders of the immune system in mammals, particularly human beings. The present invention also provides a method of treating vascular hyperpermeability, inappropriate neovascularization, proliferative diseases and/or disorders of the immune system which comprises the administration of a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I to a mammal, particularly a human being, in need thereof.
The teachings of all references, including journal articles, patents and published patent applications, are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
EXAMPLES
Compounds of the present invention were synthesized and their activity assayed as described below. SlP Receptor GTPyS Assays
The [35S]GTPyS binding assay was performed using both scintillation proximity assay (SPA) and filtration methods. Both formats are advantageously run in 96 well plates and utilize membranes from stable or transient CHO human cell lines overexpressing SlPi, SlP2, SlP3, SlP4 or SlP5. Compound stocks were made up to 10 mM using DMSO and serial dilutions were carried out using 100% DMSO. Compounds were transferred to 96 well plates to yield a final DMSO concentration of 1% for all assays (IuI for a lOOul assay volume). Frozen membranes were thawed and diluted in assay buffer containing of 20 mM HEPES pH 7.4, 0.1% fatty acid-free BSA, 10OmM NaCl, 5mM MgCl2 and 10μM GDP. For the SPA assay membranes are premixed with WGA-SPA beads to yield a final concentration per well of 5ug membrane and 500ug of bead. For the filtration assay, membranes are added directly to the incubation plate at 5ug per well. The assay begins with the addition of 50ul of the membrane or membrane/bead mixture to each well of the assay plate. Next, 50ul of 0.4nM [35S]GTPyS is added to each well and incubated for 30 minutes. Nonspecific binding is measured using lOuM unlabeled GTPyS. For the SPA assay the plates are spun and then read on the Topcount. For the filtration assay the plate is harvested onto GF-C filtration plates using a Packard 96 well harvester.
Inhibition of [33P]SlP Binding to SlP Receptors
Radio ligand binding was carried out using membranes from transiently transfected HEK cells overexpressing SlPi, SlP2, SlP3, SlP4 or SlP5. All compounds are dissolved in DMSO and serial dilutions were carried out in DMSO prior to addition to assay buffer. Final assay DMSO concentrations are 1% (v/v). [33P]SlP is purchased from Perkin Elmer and used at 50 pM in all assays. Frozen membranes are thawed and resuspended in assay buffer caontaining 50 mM HEPES pH7.4, 10OmM NaCl, 1OmM MgCl2 and 0.1% fatty acid free BSA. Membrane is added to give 5- 10 ug of membrane per well. Non-specific binding is determined in the presence of cold 1 uM SlP. Incubations are carried out at room temperature for 45-60 minutes before filtering onto GF/C filtration plates using a Packard 96 well harvester. Plates are dried before adding Microscint to each well, sealed and counted on a Topcount.
Abbreviations acac Acetylacetonate
ACN Acetonitrile 9-BBN 9-Borabicyclononane
BBr3 Borane tribromide
BINAP 2,2' -Bis(diphenylphosphino)-1 , 1 ' -binaphthalene
C2H4 Ethylene
CuI Copper(I) iodide DBAD Di-terf-butyl azodicarboxylate
DCC Dicyclohexyl carbodiimide
DCM Dichloromethane
DIEA N,yV-Diisopropylethylamine
DMA yV,/V-Dimethylacetamide DME Dimethoxyethane
DMF yV.yV-Dimethylformamide
DMSO Dimethyl sulfoxide DMSO-d6 Deuterated DMSO
Dppf l,l'-Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene
EDC (3-Dimethylamino-propyl)-ethyl-carbodiimide
Et3N Triethylamine
Et2O Diethyl ether
EtOAc Ethyl acetate
H2 Hydrogen gas
HCl Hydrochloric acid
HOAc Acetic acid
HOBt 1 -hydroxy- lH-benzotriazole
HPLC High Performance Liquid Chromatography
K2CO3 Potassium carbonate
LAH Lithium tetrahydroaluminate
LCMS Liquid chromatography mass spectrometry
LDA Lithium diisopropylamide
LiHMDS Lithium hexamethyldisilazide
MgSO4 Magnesium sulfate
MeOH-Cl4 Deuterated methanol
MeOH Methanol
NaHCO3 Sodium bicarbonate
NaOH Sodium hydroxide
NMO N-methylmorpholine-N-oxide
Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 Bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride
PPh3 Triphenylphosphine
PS-PPh3 Polymer-supported triphenylphosphine
Rh Rhodium
RP Reverse Phase
R, Retention time
(S)-BINAP (5)-(-)-2,2' -Bis(diphenylphosphino)-1 , 1 ' -binaphthalene
TBAF Tetrabutylammmoniumfluoride
TFA Trifluroacetic acid
THF Tetrahydrofuran
TLC Thin layer chromatography
ANALYTICAL METHODS
Analytical data is defined either within the general procedures or in the tables of examples. Unless otherwise stated, all 1H or 13C NMR data were collected on a Varian Mercury Plus 400 MHz or a Bruker DRX 400 MHz instrument; chemical shifts are quoted in parts per million (ppm). High- pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) analytical data are either detailed within the experimental or referenced to the table of HPLC conditions, using the lower case method letter, in Table 1.
Table 1. List of HPLC methods
HPLC Conditions
Method Unless indicated otherwise mobile phase A was 10 mM ammonium acetate, mobile phase B was HPLC grade acetonitrile. g The column used for the chromatography is a 4.6x30 mm Vydac Genesis C8 column (4 μm particles). The gradient was 5-60% B in 1.5 min then 60-95% B to 2.5 min with a hold at 95% B for 1.2 min (1.3 mL/min flow rate). Mobile phase A was water with 0.1% formic acid, mobile phase B was HPLC grade acetonitrile. Detection methods are diode array (DAD) and evaporative light scattering (ELSD) detection as well as pos/neg electrospray ionization.
GENERAL SYNTHETIC SCHEMES
The general synthetic schemes that were utilized to construct the majority of compounds disclosed in this application are described below in (Schemes 1-5). Scheme 1. General synthetic route to ((7/?,3S)-l-amino-3-substitutedphenyl- cyclopentyl)methanol (general procedures A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H)
(General procedures are noted in parentheses).
(F)
Scheme 2. General synthetic route to ((i/?,3/?)-l-amino-3-substitutedphenyl- cyclopentyl)methanol (general procedures A, I, J, E, F, G, H)
(General procedures are noted in parentheses).
Scheme 3. General synthetic route to ((l/?,3/?)-l-amino-3-(4-substituted- oxyphenyl)cyclopentyl)methanol (general procedures A, I, J, E, H, K, L, M, N)
(General procedures are noted in parentheses).
(K)
(N)
Scheme 4. General synthetic route to (l-amino-3-substituted phenyl-cyclopentyl)methyl dihydrogen phosphate (general procedure O)
(General procedures are noted in parentheses).
Scheme 5. General synthetic route to l-amino-3-substituted phenyl-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid (general procedure P) (General procedures are noted in parentheses).
Scheme 6. General synthetic route to ((l/?,3/?)-l-amino-3-substitutedphenyl- cyclopentyl)methanol (general procedures A, I, J, E, S, T, U, M, V, H)
(General procedures are noted in parentheses).
(T)
Scheme 7. General synthetic route to ((i/?,3S)-l-amino-3-substitutedphenyl- cyclopentyl)methanol (general procedures A, B, C, D, E, S, T, U, M, V, H) Cr0 Boronic acid
General General General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A B C D E S
Scheme 8. General synthetic route for preparation of ethers
R2
Procedure AA
Scheme 9. General synthetic route to (3-Amino-l-substritutedphenyl-pyrrolidin-3-yl) -methanol (general procedures BB, CC, B, D, E, H)
aniline
Rr
Br^^^^^^^ General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
BB CC B D
Scheme 10. General synthetic route to ((//?,3/?)-l-amino-3-substitutedphenyl- cyclopentyl)methanol (general procedures A, I, J, E, H, K, F, M, N)
^V ,Q Boronic acid
^ — ' General General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A I J E H
Scheme 11. General synthetic route to ((i/?,3/?)-l-amino-3-substitutedphenyl- cyclopentyl)methanol (general procedures A, I, J, E, H, K, F, G, L, M, N) ^-Tv ^O Boronic acid ^ — ' General General General General General Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A I J E H
Alkyne Alcohol
Scheme 12. General synthetic route to 3-Amino-5-substitutedphenyl-tetrahydro-furan-3- carboxylic acid (general procedure D)
Scheme 13. General synthetic route to 3-substitutedphenyl-cyclopentylsubstitutedamine (general procedures A, F, G, DD)
Scheme 14. General synthetic route to (lR,3S)-l-Amino-3-(4-substitutedphenyl)- cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester (general procedures A, B, C, D, E, F)
Boronic acid
Cr0 - General General General General General Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure A B C D E
Alkyne
General Procedure
F
Scheme 15. General synthetic route to (lR,3S)-l-Amino-3-substitutedphenyl- cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester (general procedures A, B, C, D, E, F, G) Cr0 Boronic acid
General General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A B C D E
Alkyne
General General
Procedure Procedure
F G
LIST OF GENERAL PROCEDURES
General Procedure A: Micheal addition to an alpha-beta unsaturated ketone.
General Procedure B: Formation of a hydantoin from a ketone.
General Procedure C: Formation of an N-alkylated hydantoin.
General Procedure D: Hydrolysis of a hydantoin to the corresponding amino acid.
General Procedure E: Formation of an ester from an acid. General Procedure F: Cross coupling to an aryl bromide.
General Procedure G: Reduction of an alkyne.
General Procedure H: Reduction of an ester to the alcohol.
General Procedure I: Formation of an amino-nitrile from a ketone.
General Procedure J: Hydrolysis of a nitrile to the corresponding acid. General Procedure K: Formation of an oxazolidinone from an amino-alcohol.
General Procedure L: Deprotection of a methyl-ether.
General Procedure M: Alkylation of a hydroxy-group.
General Procedure N: Hydrolysis of an oxazolidinone.
General Procedure O: Phosphorylation of an alcohol followed by deprotection. General Procedure P: Hydrolysis of an ester to the acid.
General Procedure Q: Alkylation of phenol
General Procedure R: Reduction of carboxylic acid
General Procedure S: Cbz protection of an amine.
General Procedure T: Cross coupling of an aryl bromide to a boronic acid. General Procedure U: Hydroboration reaction of an alkene.
General Procedure V: Deprotection of a Cbz group from an amine.
General Procedure W: Synthesis of an alpha-beta unsaturated ketone
General Procedure X: Addition of an organometallic reagent to an ester
General Procedure Y: Conversion of a tertiary alcohol to an alkane General Procedure Z: Hydration of an alkyne
General Procedure AA: Synthesis of an alkylether General Procedure BB: Synthesis of an N-aryl prolinol General Procedure CC: Oxidation of an alcohol to the ketone
General Procedure DD: Reductive Amination on a Ketone
EXAMPLE OF USE OF GENERAL PROCEDURES
The general procedure letter codes constitute a synthetic route to the final product. A worked example of how the route is determined is given below using Example D.2 as a non- limiting illustration. The synthesis of Example D.2 was completed using general procedure H as detailed in Table D, i.e.,
The starting material was prepared using the route (A, B, I, J, E, F, G) (as detailed in Table C).
This translates into the following sequence, where the ester starting material used in general procedure H is the product of following the procedures A, I, J, E, F and G, in the given order.
(G)
GENERAL PROCEDURES
The following describe the synthetic methods illustrated by the foregoing General Procedures schemes and are followed by an example of a compound that was synthesized by the General Procedure. None of the specific conditions and reagents noted in the following are to be construed as limiting the scope of the instant invention and are provided for illustrative purposes only.
General Procedure A: Micheal addition to an alpha-beta unsaturated ketone
A solution of substituted phenylboronic acid (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 1.5 equivalents) and a rhodium catalyst such as hydroxyl[(S)-BINAP]rodium(I) dimmer, or Rh(acac)(C2H4)2/(/?)- BINAP (preferably hydroxyl[(S)-BINAP]rodium(I) dimmer for (5)-product, Rh(acac)(C2H4)2/(Λ)- BINAP for (Λ)-product) (1 - 5 mol %, preferably 1.25 mol %) in an organic solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran, or dioxane) (preferably dioxane) and water is degassed with nitrogen. 2- cyclopenten-1-one is added to the mixture. The reaction is stirred at about 20 - 100 0C (preferably about 35 0C) for a period of 1 - 24 hours (preferably about 16 hours) under inert atmosphere. The reaction mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude product is purified via flash chromatography.
Exemplification of General Procedure A: Preparation of (S)-3-(4-bromo-phenyl)-cycIopentanone
4-Bromophenylboronic acid,
A 3L three-necked round-bottomed flask equipped with temperature probe and nitrogen bubbler was charged with 4-bromophenylboronic acid (100 g, 498 mmol) and hydroxy [(S)-
BINAP]rhodium(I) dimer (6.20 g, 4.17 mmol) in dioxane (1667 mL) and water (167 mL) at room temperature. The resulting suspension was degassed with nitrogen and 2-cyclopenten-l-one (27.8 mL, 332 mmol) was added in one portion. The mixture was further degassed for 5 minutes and heated at 35°C for about 16 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and concentrated. The brown residue was treated with EtOAc (500 mL) and filtered. The filtrate was washed with a saturated solution of NaHCO3 (500 mL) and brine (500 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated to afford a dark brown solid. The crude reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography (1: 9 EtOAc:heptane as eluant). Fractions containing product were combined and concentrated to afford (S)-3-(4-bromo-phenyl)-cyclopentanone (70.4 g, 89 %, 95 %ee as determined by chiral HPLC) as an ivory solid.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R, = 3.54 min; m/v. poor ionization; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ. 7.47 (d, 2H), 7.27 (d, 2H), 3.35 (m, IH), 2.55 (m, IH), 2.25 (m, 4H), 1.85 (m, IH)
General Procedure B: Formation of a hvdantoin from a ketone To a mixture of ammonium carbonate (1 - 10 equivalents, preferably 4.5 equivalents) and a cyanide salt (such as potassium cyanide, or sodium cyanide) (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalents) in water is added a ketone (1 equivalent). The reaction mixture is heated to reflux for a period of 2 - 40 hours (preferably 16 hours). The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and the solid is collected by filtration, washed with water to give the crude product which can be purified by trituration with a suitable solvent. Exemplification of General Procedure B:
Preparation of (S)-7-(4-bromo-phenyl)-l,3-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione
To a round bottom flask charged with ammonium carbonate (268 g, 2.79 mol) and potassium cyanide (44.4 g, 0.681 mol) was added water (1500 mL, 82 mol). The mixture was heated at 80 0C and a solution of (S)-3-(4-bromo-phenyl)-cyclopentanone (148.09 g, 0.62 mol) in ethanol (1500 mL, 25 mol) was added. The reaction mixture was heated to reflux overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature. The crude reaction mixture was filtered and washed with water. The solid was triturated with ether (1.5 L), filtered, washed with ether and dried under vacuum to yield (S)-7-(4-bromo-phenyl)-],3-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione (181.29 g, 95 %) as a 1 : 1 mixture of diastereomers.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R, = 2.24 min; m/z: 307 (M-H)"; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ 10.61 (s, IH), 8.29 (s, IH), 8.24 (s, IH), 7.49 (d, 2H), 7.27 (d, IH), 7.24 (d, IH), 3.14-3.35 (m, IH), 2.45(dd, 0.5H), 1.68-2.27 (m, 5.5H)
General Procedure C: Formation of an N-alkylated hvdantoin
To s flask containing the hydantoin ( 1 equivalent) is added a base (such as potassium carbonate, or sodium carbonate) (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 1.5 equivalents) and an organic solvent (such as DMF, or DMA) (preferably DMF). The mixture is stirred at room temperature for a period of 10 - 30 minutes (preferably about 15 minutes), then methyl iodide (1 - 2 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalents) is added. The reaction is stirred at room temperature for a period of 24 - 72 hours (preferably about 48 hours). The reaction mixture is concentrated, cooled down with ice-water bath and water is added. The precipitate is collected by filtration to give the crude product. The two stereoisomers can be separated by crystallization.
Exemplification of General Procedure C:
Preparation of (5R, 7S>7-(4-bromo-phenyl)-3-methyl-l,3-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione
To the flask containing (5)-7-(4-Bromo-phenyl)-l,3-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione (1: 1 mixture of diastereomers, 180.3 g, 0.583 mol) was added potassium carbonate (120.9 g, 0.875 mol) followed by DMF (1 L). After stirring for 15 minutes at room temperature, methyl iodide (39.9 mL, 0.642 mol) was added in one portion. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for about 48 hours. The reaction mixture was partially concentrated in vacuo at 25 0C, removing approximately 400 mL of DMF and excess methyl iodide. The crude mixture was cooled with an ice water bath and water (2 L) was added. After stirring for 1 hour the resulting white precipitate was filtered and rinsed with water (1 L). The filter cake was dried on house vacuum overnight to give 220 g crude (5)-7-(4-Bromo-phenyl)-3-methyl-l,3-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dioneas a mixture of diastereomers.
The two diastereomers can be separated by crystallization as follows: The material was separated into 2 batches of 110 g each. The crude material (110 g) was suspended in ACN (2.5 L), heated to 70 0C until near complete dissolution occurred. The material was filtered rapidly at 70 0C and rinsed with 70 0C ACN (2 x 500 mL). The combined filtrates were reheated to about 65 0C with stirring. After a clear solution was obtained the mixture was allowed to cool slowly to 50 0C at which point material began to drop out of solution. The solution was allowed to slowly cool to 30 0C with stirring (100 rpm). After aging for 2 hours the solution was filtered and the solid was dried at 65 0C under house vacuum for three hours to give (5R,7S)-7-(4-bromo-phenyl)-3-methyl-l,3- diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione (22.2 g, 12 %). (Note: During an attempt to recrystallize from acetonitrile, a mixture of the N-methyl hydantoins enriched in the (S, S)-diastereomer (2: 1 (S, S):(R, S)), a small amount of the (5S,7S)-7-(4-bromo-phenyl)-3-methyl-l,3-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane-2,4- dione (40 mg) in pure form was isolated.)
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R1 = 2.50 min; rrr/z: 321 (M-HX; 1H NMR (400MHz, DMSO-^6) 6 8.56 (s, IH), 7.50 (d, 2H, J = 8.42 Hz), 7.27 (d, 2H, J = 8.53 Hz), 3.16-3.31 (m, IH), 2.84 (s, 3H), 2.46 (dd, IH, J = 13.62, 8.40 Hz,), 2.02-2.18 (m, 2H), 1.72-1.95 (m, 3H)
General Procedure D: Hydrolysis of a hvdantoin to the corresponding amino acid
To a suspension of N-alkylated hydantoin (1 equivalent) in water is added dioxane and an inorganic base (such as lithium hydroxide, or sodium hydroxide) (5 - 15 equivalents, preferably about 8 - 10 equivalents). The mixture is heated to reflux for a period of 16 - 48 hours (preferably 24 hours). After cooling to room temperature, the reaction mixture is acidified, and filtered. The filter cake is washed with a suitable solvent and dried under vacuum to give the corresponding amino acid.
Exemplification of General Procedure D:
Preparation of (iΛ-3S)-l-amino-3-(4-bromo-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid
To a slurry of (5/?,75)-7-(4-bromo-phenyl)-3-methyl-l,3-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione (79 g, 0.24 mol) in water (1 L) was added 2 M aqueous NaOH (1 L, 2 mol) and dioxane (200 mL). The resulting mixture was heated to reflux for 24 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, diluted with water (2 L) and acidified with concentrated HCl until a precipitate began to form (about pH 7). Acetic acid (about 20 mL) was added, producing a thick precipitate. The white precipitate was collected and washed with water (2 x IL) and EtOAc (1 L). The filter cake was suspended in toluene (1 L) and concentrated in vacuo at 45°C. This process was repeated once more. The white precipitate was dried to a constant weight under vacuum to give (]R,3S)-l-amino- 3-(4-bromo-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid (65 g, 95 %).
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R1 = 1.56 min; m/z: 284/286 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ 7.55 (d, 2H), 7.3 (d, 2H), 3.3 (m, IH), 2.65 (m, IH), 2.3 (m, IH), 2.1-2.2 (m, 2H), 2.0-2.1 (m, IH), 1.85 (t, IH)
General Procedure E; Formation of a ester from an acid
An acid (1 equivalent) suspended in large excess of methanol is cooled in an ice/water bath and thionyl chloride (5 - 20 equivalents, preferably 8 - 12 equivalents) is added dropwise. The resulting mixture is heated to reflux for a period of 2 - 48 hours (preferably 24 - 36 hours). The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature, filtered and concentrated to dryness. The residue is triturated with a suitable solvent (such as EtOAc, or ether) and dried under vacuum to give the desired product.
Exemplification of General Procedure E:
Preparation of (li?r3S)-l-amino-3-(4-bromo-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester; hydrochloride
The (IR, 3S)-l-amino-3-(4-bromo-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid (79 g, 0.28 mol) suspended in MeOH (1.8 L) was cooled in an ice/water bath and thionyl chloride (178 mL, 2.44 mol) was added dropwise. Following the addition the reaction was heated to reflux, resulting in a nearly homogeneous solution. After refluxing for about 36 hours, the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, filtered, and rinsed with MeOH (2 x 200 mL). The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to provide a white solid. The white solid was triturated with EtOAc (IL), collected by filtration, rinsed with EtOAc (2 x 500 mL), and dried under vacuum to give the ( IRJS)-I -amino-3- (4-bromo-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester; hydrochloride as a white solid (79 g, 96%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ 7.55 (d, 2H), 7.35 (d, 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 3.3 (m, IH), 2.65 (m, IH), 2.3 (m, IH), 2.1-2.2 (m, 3H), 1.95-2.05 (t, IH)
General Procedure F; Cross coupling to an aryl bromide
To a flask charged with an aryl bromide (1 equivalent), an alkyne compound (1.1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 2 equivalents), triphenylphosphine (2 - 10 mol %, preferably 10 mol %), an organic base (such as piperidine, diethylamine or triethylamine) (preferably piperidine) (3 - 8 equivalents, preferably 4 - 6 equivalents) is added an organic solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, dioxane or DMF (preferably tetrahydrofuran). The mixture is degassed before adding a palladium catalyst (such as tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium or bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride) (2 - 10 mol %, preferably 5 mol %) and copper® iodide (2 -10 mol %, preferably 5 mol %). The reaction mixture is heated at 45 - 110 0C (preferably about 60 0C) for a period of 4 - 48 hours (preferably 24 - 36 hours) under inert atmosphere. During the reaction, more alkyne compound (1 - 8 equivalents, preferably 2 - 4 equivalents) is added in portions to the reaction mixture to drive the reaction to completion. Upon completion of the reaction, the mixture is concentrated to dryness, dissolved in a suitable organic solvent (such as EtOAc, or DCM), and washed with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO3, dried over an appropriate drying reagent (such as MgSO4, or Na2SO4) and concentrated to dryness to give the crude product. The crude product is purified via flash chromatography, and can be further purified by co-crystallization with tartaric acid.
Exemplification of General Procedure F:
Preparation of (2/?^S)-l-amino-3-(4-prop-l-ynyl-phenyl)-cycIopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester; compound with (2/?,3/?)-2,3-dihydroxy-succinic acid
piperidine
To a two-neck round bottom flask was added (//?,3S)-l-amino-3-(4-bromo-phenyl)- cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester; hydrochloride (3.94 g, 0.0118mol), 1-octyne (3.48 mL, 0.0235 mol), triphenylphosphine (0.309 g, 0.00118 mol), piperidine (6.99 mL, 0.0706 mol), and THF (100 mL, 1 mol). The mixture was degassed, and Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (0.41 g, 0.00059 mol) was added and the mixture was stirred for a few minutes under an atmosphere of nitrogen before addition of the copper(I) iodide (0. H g, 0.00059 mol). The reaction was stirred under an atmosphere of nitrogen at 60 0C for 2 hours. More 1-octyne (12 mL, 0.081 mmol) was added in 3 portions. The reaction mixture was heated at 60 0C for a total of about 36 hours. The solvent was then removed and crude material was partitioned between EtOAc and saturated NaHCO3. The aqueous layer was back-extracted once with EtOAc. Organic layers were combined, dried over MgSO4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography using EtOAc followed by 2% MeOH in EtOAc to give 3.38 g crude product as a yellow oil. The crude product was dissolved in minimum amount of MeOH, to which L-tartaric acid ( 1.69 g) in MeOH was added. Ether was then added dropwise until solution just turned turbid. The mixture was left to crystallize. The solid was collected by filtration, washed with ether to give 3.91 g (72.6 %) (1R.3S)- 1 -amino-3-(4-prop-l -ynyl-phenyl)'Cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester; compound with (2R, 3R)-2,3-dihydroxy-succinic acid.
(Tartrate salt) LCMS (Table 1, Method b) R1 = 2.17 min; m/z: 328 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J6,) δ 7.30 (m, 2H), 7.24 (m, 2H), 4.4 (s, 2H), 3.89 (m, 3H), 3.42 (m, IH), 2.7 (m, IH), 2.46 (m, IH), 2.39 (m, 2H), 2.22 (m, IH), 2.15 (m, IH), 2.05 (m, IH), 1.95 (m, IH), 1.55 (m, 2H), 1.45 (m, 2H), 1.33 (m, 4H), 0.9 (m, 3H).
Preparation of (//?r5/?)-l-amino-3-(4-prop-l-ynyl-phenyI)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester; compound with (2/?,3/?)-2,3-dihydroxy-succinic acid
piperidine
To a three-neck round bottom flask was added (7/?,3/?)-l-amino-3-(4-bromo-phenyl)- cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester; hydrochloride (4.00 g, 12.0 mmol), 1-octyne (3.54 mL, 24.0 mmol), triphenylphosphine (314 mg, 1.20 mmol), piperidine (7.13 ml, 72.0 mmol), and THF (100 mL). The mixture was degassed, and Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (421 mg, 0.60 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for a few minutes under an atmosphere of nitrogen before addition of the copper(I) iodide (114 mg, 0.60 mmol). The reaction was stirred under an atmosphere of nitrogen at 60 0C for 4 hours. More 1-octyne (5.31 mL, 36.0 mmol) was added in two portions and the reaction mixture was heated at 60 0C for a total of about 30 hours. The solvent was then removed and crude material was partitioned between EtOAc and saturated NaHCθ3. The aqueous layer was back- extracted once with EtOAc. Organic layers were combined, dried over MgSO4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography using EA followed by 2% MeOH in EtOAc to give 3.52 g (90%) crude product as a yellow oil. A portion of the crude product (60.0mg, 0.126 mmol) was dissolved in minimum amount of MeOH, to which L- tartaric acid (1.69 g) in MeOH was added. Ether was then added dropwise until solution just turned turbid. The mixture was left to crystallize. The solid was collected by filtration, washed with ether to give 45.0 mg (60%) (lR,3R)-l-amino-3-(4-prop-l-ynyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester; compound with (2R, 3R)-2,3-dihydroxy-succinic acid. (Tartrate salt) LCMS (Table 1, Method b) R, = 2.17 min; m/z: 328 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6,) δ 7.30 (m, 2H), 7.22 (m, 2H), 4.01 (s, 2H), 3.73 (m, 3H), 3.43 (m, IH), 2.40 (m, IH), 2.31 (m, IH), 2.20 (m, IH), 2.11 (m, 2H), 1.76 (m, 2H), 1.52 (m, 2H), 1.41 (m, 2H), 1.29 (m, 4H), 0.88 (m, 3H).
General Procedure G: Reduction of an alkvne
To a reaction vessel charged with palladium hydroxide on carbon (10 - 30 % by weight, preferably 20 % by weight) is added acetic acid and an alkyne compound (1 equivalent). The reaction mixture is evacuated, back-filled with nitrogen followed by two cycles of evacuating and back-filling with hydrogen gas. The reaction is charged to about 30 - 60 psi (preferably about 50 psi) with hydrogen and is shaken at room temperature for a period of 0.5 - 24 hours (preferably about 1 hour). The crude mixture is filtered, washed with a suitable solvent such as ethanol, and concentrated. The residue can be purified by crystallization with ethanol/water mixture to give the desired product.
Exemplification of General Procedure G:
Preparation of (IR -3S)-l-amino-3-(4-octyl-phenyI)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester
185 mg of palladium hydroxide on carbon (20% by weight) and acetic acid (25 mL, 0.44 mol) were loaded into a Parr shaker. (7/?,JS)-l-Amino-3-(4-oct-l-ynyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester; compound with (2/?,3/?)-2,3-dihydroxy-succinic acid (2.49 g, 0.00521 mol) was added and the reaction was evacuated, back-filled with nitrogen, followed by two cycles of evacuating and back-filling with hydrogen gas. The reaction was then pressurized to about 50 psi using hydrogen. The reaction was shaken at room temperature for 50 minutes. The crude mixture was filtered through Celite® and washed with ethanol. The filtrate was concentrated, and the residue was brought up in a small amount of ethanol. Water was added. The mixture was nearly clear. The ethanol was removed under reduced pressure, and the remainingaqueous solution was left to stand. After a few minutes, needle-like crystals began to form. More water was added, and the mixture left to crystallize. The white solid was collected by filtration, and washed with water three times. The white solid was freeze-dried to remove remaining water. 1.9 g (90 %) of ( 1 R,3S)-1 -amino-3-(4- octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester ; compound with 0.5 equivalent of (2R,3R)- 2,3-dihydroxy-succinic acid was obtained as fluffy white solid.
(1/2 Tartrate salt) LCMS (Table 1, Method b) R, = 2.56 min; m/z: 332 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-4) δ 7.2 (m, 2H), 7.1 (m, 2H), 4.35 (s, IH), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.33 (m, IH), 2.67 (m, IH), 2.57 (m, 2H), 2.4 (m, IH), 2.19 (m, IH), 2.13 (m, 2H), 1.95 (m, IH), 1.59 (m, 2H), 1.3 (m, 10H), 0.9 (m, 3H)
General Procedure H: Reduction of an ester to the alcohol
A substituted 1-amino-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester dissolved in a suitable solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran or ether) is cooled to below room temperature (about 0 - 10 0C, preferably 0 0C). To this solution is added slowly a reducing reagent such as LAH (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 2 equivalents). The reaction mixture is stirred for a period of 0.5 - 6 hours (preferably 0.5 - 2 hours). The reaction mixture is worked up by successive addition of n mL of water, n mL of 2 M NaOH solution, and 2n mL of water for n g of LAH used in the reaction. After stirred for a period of 1 -24 hours (preferably 2 hours), Na2SO4 is added and the precipitate is filtered off. The product precipitates out as hydrochloride by adding HCl to the filtrate.
Exemplification of General Procedure H:
Preparation of [(//?r3S)-l-amino-3-(4-octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentyl]-methanol
l-Amino-3-(4-octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methyl ester; hydrochloride (640 mg,
0.0017 mol) was partitioned between Et2O and 2 M NaOH solution. The organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The free base was dissolved in Et2O (20 mL) and cooled to 0 0C. To this solution was added LAH (130 mg, 0.0035 mol) slowly. After 30 minutes, water (130 uL) was added followed by 2 M NaOH (130 uL) followed by water (260 uL). After stirring for 2 hours, Na2SO4 was added and the white precipitate was filtered off. IM HCl in Et2O (3.4 mL) was added to the filtrate and the resulting fine precipitate was collected to provide 470 mg (79 %) of the [( 1 R,3S)-1 -amino-3-(4-octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentyl]- methano\; hydrochloride.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R1 = 2.64 min; m/z: 304 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.26 (bs, 3H), 7.06 (d, 2H), 7.02 (d, 2H), 3.79 (s, 2H), 3.62 (m, IH), 2.52 (m, 3H), 2.52 (m, 3H), 2.13 (m, 3H), 1.76 (m, IH), 1.64 (m, IH), 1.54 (m, 3H), 1.27 (m, 12H), 0.87(t, 3H) General Procedure I: Formation of an amino-nitrile from a ketone
To a substituted cyclopentanone in methanolic ammonia solution is added ammonium chloride (1 - 4 equivalents, preferably 2 equivalents) and a cyanide salt such as sodium cyanide or potassium cyanide (1 - 4 equivalents, preferably 2 equivalents). The reaction is capped and stirred at room temperature for a period of 12 - 72 hours (preferably about 36 hours). The crude reaction mixture is concentrated, partitioned between a suitable solvent (such as EtOAc or DCM) and a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO3. The organic layers are combined, washed with water, dried over an appropriated drying reagent (such as Na2SO4 or MgSO4), and concentrated to dryness. The two stereoisomers can be separated by co-crystallization with tartaric acid in methanol.
Exemplification of General Procedure I:
Preparation of (//?r3Λ)-l-amino-3-(4-methoxy-phenyI)-cyclopentanecarbonitrile; compound with (2/?,3/?)-2,3-dihydroxy-succinic acid
A solution of (/?)-3-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-cyclopentanone (11.0 g, 57.9 mmol) in 7 M methanolic ammonia solution was treated with ammonium chloride (6.21 g, 116 mmol) and sodium cyanide (5.68 g, 116 mmol). The reaction was stoppered and stirred at room temperature for about 48 hours. The reaction was concentrated, treated with saturated NaHCO3 solution (80 mL) and extracted with DCM (2 x 100 mL). The DCM extracts were washed with water (40 mL), dried over MgSO4, and concentrated to an oil to give the product as a mixture of diastereomers. The (1R,3R)- isomer was separated as follows:
The residue was dissolved in methanol (100 mL) and the solution is added to a solution of L-tartaric acid (8.69 g, 57.9 mmol) in methanol (100 mL). The resulting solid was collected and triturated repeatedly with portions of methanol (80 mL) until the more soluble isomer was gone as indicated by HPLC (50 x 4.6 mm ThermoQuest Hypercarb column, 5 μm, part # 35005-025). The remaining white solid was dried to yield 6.0 g (28%) of (1 R,3R)-1 -amino-3-(4-methoxy-phenyl)- cyclopentanecarbonitrile; compound with (2R, 3R)-2,3-dihydroxy-succinic acid. LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R, = 2.26 min; m/z: poor ionization; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-tfc) δ 7.18 (d, 2H), 6.85 (d, 2H), 4.22 (s, 2H), 3.72 (s, 3H), 3.30-3.41 (m, IH), 2.10-2.30 (m, 3H), 1.8-2.0 (m, 2H), 1.6-1.75 (m, IH).
General Procedure J: Hydrolysis of a nitrile to the corresponding acid
A substituted l-amino-cyclopentanecarbonitrile in 6 M hydrochloric acid and dioxane is heated at 80 - 110 0C (preferably about 100 0C) for a period of 12 - 24 hours (preferably 16 hours). The reaction mixture is cooled on ice. The precipitate is collected by filtration and washed with water to give the desired product.
Exemplification of General Procedure J:
Preparation of (lΛy3/?)-l-amino-3-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid; hydrochloride
A suspension of (//?,5/?)-l-amino-3-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarbonitrile; compound with
(2ft,3#)-2,3-dihydroxy-succinic acid (5.0 g, 13.66 mmol) in 6 M hydrochloric acid (50 mL) and dioxane (5 mL) was heated at 1000C for about 16 hours under nitrogen. The reaction was cooled on ice and the product was filtered off, washed with water (3 x 5 mL) and dried to yield 2.72 g (74%) of ( 1 R,3R)-1 -amino-3-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid; hydrochloride as a white solid.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R, = 1.43 min; m/z: 236 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ 13.9 (s, IH), 8.55 (s), 3H), 7.17 (d, 2H), 6.88 (d, 2H), 3.40-3.52 (m, IH), 2.28-2.40 (m, 2H), 2.13-2.20
(m, 2H), 1.90-1.99 (m, IH), 1.74-1.85 (m, IH).
General Procedure K: Formation of an oxazoiidinone from an amino-alcohol To a mixture of amino-alcohol in diethyl carbonate (10 - 20 equivalents, preferably 15 equivalents) is added potassium carbonate (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 1.15 equivalents). The mixture is heated to reflux for a period of 12 - 48 hours (preferably about 20 hours). The reaction is concentrated and the residue is partitioned between a suitable organic solvent (such as EtOAc or DCM) and water. The organic layer is dried over an appropriate drying reagent (such as MgSO4 or Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. The crude product is further purified via flash chromatography.
Exemplification of General Procedure K: Preparation of (5/?,7/?)-7-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-3-oxa-l-aza-spiro[4.4]nonan-2-one
To a suspension of [(//?, 3R)-l-amino-3-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-cyclopentyl]-methanol (6.70 g, 30.3 mmol) in diethyl carbonate was added K2CO3 (4.83 g, 35.0 mmol) and the mixture was heated at reflux for about 20 hours. The reaction was concentrated, taken up in EtOAc (150 mL), washed with water (75 mL), dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was further purified via flash chromatogrphy with a gradient of from 40% to 80% EtOAc in heptane. Pure fractions were combined and concentrated to yield 5.99 g (80%) of (5R,7R)-7-(4-methoxy-phenyl)- 3-oxa-l-aza-spiro[4.4]nonan-2-one as a white solid. LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R1 = 2.18 min; m/z: 248 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^5) δ 8.05 (s(broad), IH), 7.14 (d, 2H), 6.84 (d, 2H), 4.22 (dd, 2H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 3.17 (m, IH), 1.98 - 2.15 (m, 3H), 1.7 - 1.85 (m, 2H), 1.49 - 1.60 (m, IH)
General Procedure L: Deprotection of a methyl-ether
A methyl ether compound in a suitable solvent (such as dichloromethane, or dichloroethane) is cooled in an ice bath and BBr3 (1 - 5 equivalents, preferably 3 equivalents) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred at about 0 0C for a period of 0.5 - 2 hours (preferably 0.5 hour). The reaction is quenched with a protic solvent such as methanol or water, warmed up to room temperature, and concentrated to dryness. The residue is triturated with water, filtered to give the desired product.
Exemplification of General Procedure L: Preparation of (5R ,7R )-7-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)-3-oxa-l-aza-spiro[4.4]nonan-2-one
A solution of (5/?,7/?)-7-(4-methoxy-phenyl)-3-oxa-l-aza-spiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (3.95 g, 16.0 mmol) in DCM (30 mL) was cooled in an ice bath and IM BBr3 in DCM solution (64.0 mL, 64.0 mmol) was added at a rapid dropwise rate and the reaction was allowed to continue stirring at about 0 0C for about 0.5 hour. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of methanol (25.0 mL). The reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature and then concentrated. The residue was triturated with water (50 mL), filtered, rinsed with water (2 x 5.0 mL), and dried to yield 3.14 g (84%) of (5R,7R)-7-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)-3-oxa-l-aza-spiro[4.4]nonan-2-one as a gray solid. LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R, = 1.70 min; mJz: 234 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (DMSO-^6) 5 9.15 (s, IH), 8.04 (s, IH), 7.01 (d, 2H), 6.67 (d, 2H), 4.21 (d,d, 2H), 3.11 (m, IH), 1.97-2.13 (m, 3H), 1.68-1.83 (m, 2H), 1.46-1.58 (m, IH)
General Procedure M: Alkylation of a hydroxy-group
A solution of a phenol, an alcohol (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalents) and resin bound triphenylphospine (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 2.2 equivalents) in a suitable solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran, dichloromethane) is cooled to about 0 0C. An azodicarboxylate (such as diethyl azodicarboxylate, diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, or di-tørz-butyl azodicarboxylate) (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalents) is added to the mixture. The reaction is warmed up to room temperature and shaken for a period of 2 - 24 hours (preferably 3 hours). The resin is filtered off and rinsed with a suitable solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran, dichloromethane). The filtrate is concentrated to dryness. The crude product is further purified via flash chromatography.
Exemplification of General Procedure M:
Preparation of (5Λ,7/?)-7-(4-octyloxy-phenyl)-3-oxa-l-aza-spiro[4.4]nonan-2-one
A solution of (5R,7/?)-7-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)-3-oxa-l-aza-spiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (75 mg, 0.32 mmol), octanol (55.6 μL, 0.35 mmol) and resin bound triphenylphosphine (343 mg, 2 mmol / g, 0.70 mmol) in THF (4.0 mL) was cooled to about 0 0C and di-tert-butyl azodicarboxylate (80.5 mg, 0.35 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction was allowed to warm up to room temperature for about 3 hours, then the resin was filtered off and washed with DCM (10 mL). The filtrates were combined and concentrated. The crude product was purified on silica gel using a gradient of 30% to 60% EtOAc in heptane. Pure fractions were combined and concentrated to yield 67.0 mg (61%) of (5R,7R)-7-(4-octyloxy-phenyl)-3-oxa-]-aza-spiro[4.4]nonan-2-one as a white solid. LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R1 = 3.76 min; m/z: 346 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.04 (s(broad, IH), 7.10 (d, 2H), 6.81 (d, 2H), 4.20 (dd, 2H), 3.89 (t, 2H), 3.15 (m, IH), 1.99-2.13 (m, 3H), 1.61- 1.82 (m, 4H), 1.46-1.59 (m, IH), 1.20-1.44 (m, 10H), 0.84 (t, 3H)
General Procedure N; Hydrolysis of an oxazolidinone
To an oxazolidinone dissolved in a suitable solvent (such as dioxane, or tetrahydrofuran) is added water and an inorganic base (such as lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide) (10 -20 equivalents, preferably 12 - 15 equivalents). The mixture is heated to reflux for a period of 2 - 24 hours (preferably about 10 hours). The reaction is concentrated, partitioned between a suitable organic solvent (such as ether, or ethyl acetate) and water. The organic layer is dried over an appropriate drying reagent (such as Na2SO4, MgSO4), filtered and concentrated. The product can be isolated as an ammonium salt by treating the residue with an inorganic acid (such as HCl).
Exemplification of General Procedure N: Preparation of [(//?^/?)-l-amino-3-(4-octyloxy-phenyl)-cyclopentyl]-methanol; hydrochloride
A solution of (5/?, 7R)-7-(4-octyloxy-phenyl)-3-oxa-l-aza-spiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (61.0 mg, 0.177 mmol) in dioxane (3.0 mL) was treated with lithium hydroxide, hydrate (100 mg, 2.38 mmol) and water (1.0 mL). The mixture was heated to reflux for about 10 hours. The reaction was concentrated, treated with water (10 mL) and extracted twice with ether (10 mL). The ether extracts were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was treated with 2 M HCl (2.0 mL) to yield a white solid which was collected and dried to yield 33.0 mg (52%) of [( 1 R,3R)-1 -Amino- 3 -(4-octyloxy-phenyl)-cyclopentyl] -methanol; hydrochloride. LCMS (Table 1, Method a) Rt = 2.58 min; m/z: 320 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^5) δ 7.89 (s(broad), 3H), 7.12 (d, 2H), 6.83 (d, 2H), 5.56 (s(broad), IH), 3.90 (t, 2H), 3.46 (m, IH), 1.96 - 2.10 (m, 2H), 1.56 - 1.74 (m, 4H), 1.32-1.42 (m, 2H), 1.18-1.32 (m, 10H), 0.85 (t, 3H)
General Procedure O: Phosphorylation of an alcohol followed by deprotection
An alcohol dissolved in a suitable solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran, dioxane) is treated with a strong base (such as LiHMDS, NaH) (1 - 2.5 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalents) for a period of 10 - 30 minutes (preferably 20 minutes) under inert atmosphere. Tetrabenzyl diphosphate (1 -
1.5 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalents) is added to the mixture and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for a period of 0.5 - 4 hours (preferably 1 hour). The reaction is filtered and the filtrate is concentrated. The phosphate ester intermediate is dissolved in a suitable solvent (such as acetic acid, or ethanol), to which Pearlman's Catalyst (5 - 20 mol %, preferably 5 - 10 mol
%) is added. The mixture is attached to a hydrogen balloon and stirred at room temperature for a period of 2 - 24 hours (preferably 14 hours). The crude reaction is filtered, concentrated and purified by trituration with a suitable solvent (such as a small amount of DMSO and water) to give the desired product. Alternatively, the phosphate ester intermediate is taken up in a solution of HBr in acetic acid, stirred at 0-500C (preferably room temperature) for 1-30 minutes (preferably 5 minutes) then concentrated. The residue is triturated with a suitable organic solvent such as ether, ethyl acetate or acetonitrile (preferably acetonitrile), then is triturated with dilute aqueous ammonium acetate solution, filtered and dried.
Exemplification of General Procedure O:
Preparation of phosphoric acid mono-[(77?, JS^l-arnino-S-^-octyl-phenyO-cyclopentylmethyl] ester
((7R,35)-l-Amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)methanol; tartrate salt (0.250 g) was free- based by partitioning between ether and saturated NaHC03 solution, drying over MgSO4, filtering, and concentrating to give ((7/?,35)-l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)methanol (138 mg, 0.455 mmol) as a white powder that was used directly in the reaction. A 200 mL round-bottomed flask equipped with rubber septum and nitrogen inlet needle was charged with ((7/?,3S)-l-amino-3-(4- octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)methanol (0.138 g, 0.455 mmol) and THF (10 mL) to give a colorless solution. 1.1 M LiHMDS solution in THF (0.459 mL, 0.500 mmol) was added dropwise via a syringe. The resulting solution was allowed to stir at room temperature for about 20 minutes. Tetrabenzyl diphosphate (0.269 g, 0.500 mmol) was added in one portion. The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. 1.25 M HCl solution in ethanol (0.728 mL, 0.909 mmol) was added in one portion. The resulting solution was concentrated and the residue was dissolved in EtOH (10 mL) and the reaction flask was charged with Pearlman's Catalyst (0.016 g, 0.023 mmol). The resulting suspension was attached to a hydrogen balloon and stirred at room temperature for 14 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite®. The filtrate was concentrated and triturated with water to give a white precipitate that was collected by filtration and washed with DMSO (2 x 2 mL) followed by water (2 x 10 mL), and dried under vacuum to give phosphoric acid mono-[( 1 R,3S)-1 -aminoS-f^octyl-phenyO-cyclopentylmethyl] ester as a white powder (0.147 g, 84 %). LCMS (Table 1, Method d) Rt = 2.36 min; m/z: 382 (M-H)"; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ 7.89 (s, broad, 3H), 7.12 (d, 2H), 6.83 (d, 2H), 5.56 (s, broad, IH), 3.90 (t, 2H), 3.46 (m, IH), 1.96 - 2.10 (m, 2H), 1.56 - 1.74 (m, 4H), 1.32-1.42 (m, 2H), 1.18-1.32 (m, 10H), 0.85 (t, 3H) Exemplification of General Procedure O:
Phosphorylation of an alcohol followed by deprotection
An alcohol dissolved in a suitable solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran, dioxane) is treated with a strong base (such as LiHMDS, NaH) (1 - 2.5 equivalents, preferably 1.0 equivalents) for a period of 10 - 30 minutes (preferably 20 minutes) under inert atmosphere. Tetrabenzyl diphosphate (1 - 1.5 equivalents, preferably 1.0 equivalents) is added to the mixture and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for a period of 0.5 - 4 hours (preferably 2 hour). The reaction is briefly cooled to about 00C and the precipitated solid is removed by filtration and the filtrate is concentrated. The residue is taken up in a solution of HBr in acetic acid, stirred at 0-50°C (preferably room temperature) for 1-30 minutes (preferably 5 minutes) then concentrated. The residue is triturated with a suitable organic solvent such as ether, ethyl acetate or acetonitrile (preferably acetonitrile), then is triturated with dilute aqueous ammonium acetate solution, filtered and dried.
Exemplification of General Procedure O:
Preparation of Phosphoric acid mono-{(lR,3S)-l-amino-3-[3,5-dichloro-4-(2-phenoxy-ethoxy)- phenylj-cyclopentylmethyl} ester
A 25 mL round-bottomed flask equipped with rubber septum and nitrogen inlet needle was charged with {(lR,3S)-l-Amino-3-[3,5-dichloro-4-(2-phenoxy-ethoxy)-phenyl]-cyclopentyl }- methanol (50.0 mg, 0.126 mmol) and THF (4 mL) to give a colorless solution. An LiHMDS solution in THF (1.0 M, 0.126 mL, 0.126 mmol) was added dropwise via a syringe. The resulting solution was allowed to stir at room temperature for about 20 minutes. Tetrabenzyl diphosphate
(67.9 mg, 0.126 mmol) was added in one portion. The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 2 hour. Cool briefly to 00C and filter off solids, washing with THF (1.0 ml). The resulting solution was concentrated and the residue was dissolved in 33% HBr in acetic acid (1.5 ml) and stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes then concentrated. The residue was triturated with ether (2 X 5.0 ml) and with dilute aqueous ammonium acetate solution (2 X 5.0 ml) then filtered and dried to yield Phosphoric acid mono-{( 1 R,3S)-l-amino-3-[3,5-dichloro-4-(2-phenoxy-ethoxy)- phenyl] -cyclopentylmethyl} (34 mg, 57 %) as an off-white powder.
LCMS (Table 1, Method d) R1 = 2.73 min; m/z: 476 / 478 / 480 (M-H) ; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSCW6 + 3 uL Tfa) δ 8.15 (s, broad, 3H), 7.40 (s, 2H), 7.29 (m, 2H), 6.94 (m, 3H), 4.32 (s, 4H), 3.96 (m, 2H), 3.33 (m, IH), 2.1 1 (m, 3H), 1.85 (m, IH), 1.71(m, 2H) Exemplification of General Procedure O:
Phosphorylation of an alcohol followed by deprotection with HBr
Preparation of ((lR,3R)-l-amino-3-(4-(3-(thiophen-2-yl)propoxy)phenyl)cyclopentyl)methyl dihydrogen phosphate
((lR,3R)-l-amino-3-(4-(3-(thiophen-2-yl)propoxy)phenyl)cyclopentyl)methanol (0.05 g, 0.151 inmol) was dissolved in THF (3.02 nil) under nitrogen. Lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (0.151 ml, 0.151 mmol) (Aldrich) was added and the reaction stirred for 30 min. Tetrabenzyl diphosphate (0.081 g, 0.151 mmol) (Fluka) was added and the reaction stirred for 16 h. The resulting solid was removed by vacuum filtration and washed with THF. The filtrate was concentrated and a mixture of hydrogen bromide in acetic acid (0.030 ml, 0.151 mmol) (Aldrich) and triisopropylsilane (0.031 ml, 0.151 mmol) (Aldrich) were added. The reaction was stirred for about 30 min. at which time LC MS showed reaction complete. The reaction was diluted with ether (15 mL), depositing a residue on the sides of the flask, and stirred until the ether was clear. The ether was decanted and the residue washed with ether. 1 mM ammonium acetate buffer (-5 mL) was added and the flask sonicated. A light tan precipitate resulted. The resulting solid was collected by vacuum filtration and washed with water and then acetonitrile to provide ((lR,3R)-l-amino-3-(4-(3-(thiophen-2- yl)propoxy)phenyl)cyclopentyl)methyl dihydrogen phosphate (0.024 g, 0.058 mmol, 38.7 % yield) as a tan solid on drying: LC/MS (table 1, method A) R, = 2.57 min.; MS m/z: 412.35 (MH-H)+.
General Procedure P: Hydrolysis of an ester to the acid
To an ester dissolved in a suitable solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran, dioxane) is added a suitable inorganic base (such as lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide) (5 - 10 equivalents, preferably 10 equivalents) and water. The mixture is heated at 45 - 65 0C (preferably 50 0C) for a period of 2 - 24 hours (preferably 4 - 5 hours). The crude reaction is acidified with acid. The precipitate is collected by filtration, washed with ether and water, dried to give the desired product.
Exemplification of General Procedure P:
Preparation of phosphoric acid mono-[(i/fr3S)-l-amino-3-(4-octyl-phenyl)- cyclopentylmethyl] ester; hydrochloride
To a solution of (7Λ, 3S)-methyl l-amino-3-(4-(non-l-ynyl)phenyl)cyclopentane carboxylate (0.600 g, 1.757 mmol) in THF (5 mL), sodium hydroxide (0.703 g, 17.57 mmol) dissolved in water (5 mL) was added. The reaction was heated to 60 0C for 4 - 5 hours. The reaction mixture was acidified to pH 1-2 with 6 M HCl. The resulting mixture was shaken with 1: 1 water and ether mixture (40 mL). The resulting mixture was filtered. The solid was washed a few times with diethyl ether, water, and air-dried to yield 311 mg (48 %) phosphoric acid mono-[(lR,3S)-l- umino-3-(4-octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentylmethyl] ester; hydrochloride as a shiny white solid. LCMS (Table 1, Method b) Rt = 2.47 min; m/z: 348 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, MeOD-^4) 5 7.2 (dd, 4H), 3.48 (m, IH), 2.73 (m, IH), 2.51 (m, IH), 2.39 (m, IH), 2.26 (m, IH), 2.13 (m, IH), 2.03 (m, IH), 1.85 (m, IH), 1.59 (m, 2H), 1.47 (m, 2H), 1.33 (m, 6H), 0.99 (t, 3H)
General Procedure Q: Alkylation of phenol
A solution of substituted phenol in an organic solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran, DMF or dioxane) (preferably DMF) is added dropwise to a stirred suspension of Sodium Hydride in the same solvent at -10-300C, preferably about 00C under an inert atmosphere. The alkylating agent, for example Ethyl bromoacetate, Iodomethane, Iodoethane or tert-Butyl bromoacetate, is added dropwise to the stirred anion and then the reaction is warmed to 20-1000C, preferably room temperature for 1-24 hours. The reaction is then concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude product is taken up in Ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, concentrated and further purified via flash chromatography.
Exemplification of General Procedure Q: Preparation of (3-Fluoro-phenoxy)-acetic acid ethyl ester
A 50ml three-necked round-bottomed flask equipped with temperature probe and nitrogen bubbler was charged with Sodium Hydride (785 mg, 19.6 mmol) and DMF (10.0 ml) and cooled to 00C. A solution of 3-Fluorophenol (2.00 g, 17.8 mmol) in DMF (2.0 ml) was added dropwise maintaining reaction temperature below 100C. The mixture was stirred for an additional 15 minutes then Ethyl bromoacetate (2.48 ml, 22.3 mmol) was added dropwise maintaining the reaction temperature below 100C. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The reaction was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude product was taken up in Ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried (Na2SCU), filtered, concentrated and further purified via flash chromatography using 4 : 1 / heptane : Ethyl acetate as eluant. Fractions containing product were combined and concentrated to afford (3-Fluoro-phenoxy)-acetic acid ethyl ester (2.26 g, 69 %) as a clear oil.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) mJz: poor ionization; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^5) δ. 7.32 (m, IH), 6.81 (m, 3H), 4.81 (s, 2H), 4.17 (q, 2H), 1.21 (t, 3H)
Preparation of (3-Ethoxy-phenyl)-acetic acid ethyl ester
A 100ml three-necked round-bottomed flask equipped with temperature probe and nitrogen bubbler was charged with Sodium Hydride (2.89 g, 72.3 mmol) and DMF (30.0 ml) and cooled to 00C. A solution of (3-Hydroxy-phenyl)-acetic acid (5.00 g, 32.9 mmol) in DMF (10.0 ml) was added dropwise maintaining reaction temperature below 100C. The mixture was stirred for an additional 15 minutes then Ethyl iodide (5.84 ml, 72.3 mmol) was added dropwise maintaining the reaction temperature below 100C. The reaction was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was then concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude product was taken up in Ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried (Na2SCU), filtered, concentrated and further purified via flash chromatography using 8 : 1 / heptane : Ethyl acetate as eluant. Fractions containing product were combined and concentrated to afford (3-Ethoxy-phenyl)-acetic acid ethyl ester (3.48 g, 51 %) as a clear oil.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) 3.64 min, m/z: poor ionization; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSOd6) δ. 7.22 (m, IH), 6.83 (m, 3H), 4.15 (q, 2H), 4.03 (q, 2H), 3.57 (s, 2H), 1.40 (t, 3H), 1.25 (t, 3H)
Preparation of (S)-l-Phenoxy-propan-2-ol
A microwave vessel was charged with (S)-2-methyl-oxirane (0.46 ml, 7.78 mmol), triethylamine (0.33 ml, 2.36 mmol), phenol (222 mg, 2.36 mmol) and DMF (2.0 ml). The mixture was heated by microwave for 20 minutes at 1500C. The reaction was concentrated and dried under reduced pressure. The crude mixture (approximately 9: 1) was dissolved in DMF (3.0 ml) and treated with imidazole (160 mg, 2.36 mmol) and triisopropylchlorosilane (181 mg, 0.94 mmol) overnight at room temperature under nitrogen. The reaction was concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude product was purified via flash chromatography using 3 : 2 / heptane : Ethyl acetate as eluant. Fractions containing product were combined and concentrated to afford (S)-I- Phenoxy-propan-2-ol (390 mg, 62 %) as a clear oil. LCMS (Table 1, Method a) m/z: poor ionization; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ. 7.30 (m, 2H), 6.90 (m, 3H), 4.80 (d, IH), 3.90 (m, IH), 3.80 (m, 2H), 1.10 (d, 3H)
General Procedure R: Reduction of carboxylic acid
A solution of carboxylic acid in an organic solvent (such as tetrahydrofuran or dioxane) (preferably THF) is added dropwise to a stirred solution of borane in THF at 0-500C, preferably about 23°C under an inert atmosphere. The reaction is stirred at warmed to 20-500C, preferably room temperature for 1-24 hours. The reaction is then quenched by cautious addition of methanol at 0-500C, preferably about room temperature. The crude product is concentrated under reduced pressure, taken up in ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated
Exemplification of General Procedure R:
Preparation of 2-(3-Methoxy-phenoxy)-ethanol
Borane
A 250ml three-necked round-bottomed flask equipped with temperature probe and nitrogen bubbler was charged with IM Borane/THF solution (60.4 ml, 60.4 m mol) and a solution of (3- Methoxy-phenoxy)-acetic acid (5.00 g, 27.4 mmol) in THF (2.0 ml) was added dropwise, maintaining reaction temperature below 3O0C. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature overnight. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of methanol (20 ml) maintaining the reaction temperature below 35°C. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield 2-(3-Methoxy-phenoxy)-ethanol (4.51 g, 98%) as a clear oil which was used without further purification. LCMS (Table 1, Method a) 2.43 min., m/z: 169 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ. 7.15 (m, IH), 6.48 (m, 3H), 4.81 (t, IH), 3.94 (t, 2H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 3.68 (m, 2H)
General Procedure S: Cbz protection of an amine
To the appropriately substituted amine in a suitable organic solvent (preferably acetonitrile) and water mixture (about 1: 1 to 8: 1 ratio, preferably 4: 1 ratio) is added N-
(Benzyloxycarbonyloxy)succinimide (preferably 1 equivalent) followed by potassium carbonate (preferably 1 equivalent). The reaction mixture is stirred at ambient temperature for a period of 1 - 4 hours (preferably 1 hour). The solvent is then removed and the remaining aqueous slurry is taken up in water and organic solvent (preferably ethyl acetate). The organic layer is washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting crude can be purified by column chromatography to give the desired product.
Exemplification of General Procedure S:
Preparation of (1R,3R )-methyl l-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-3-(4- bromophenyl)cyclopentanecar boxy late
To (lR,3R)-methy\ l-amino-3-(4-bromophenyl)cyclopentanecarboxylate (1.5 g, 5.03 mmol) in acetonitrile (7.2 ml) and water (1.800 ml) was added N-(Benzyloxycarbonyloxy)succinimide (1.254 g, 5.03 mmol) followed by potassium carbonate (0.695 g, 5.03 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 hour ar room temperature. The solvent was removed and the remaining aqueous slurry was taken up in water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was removed and washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified by flash chromatography to yield (lR,3R)-methyl 1 -(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-3-(4- bromophenyljcyclopentanecarboxylate (1.4 g, 3.24 mmol, 64.4 % yield) as an off white gum. LCMS (Table 1, Method b) R, = 3.01 min; m/z: 433.28 (M+H)+.
General Procedure T: Cross coupling of an aryl bromide to a boronic acid
To a flask charged with an aryl bromide (1 equivalent), a boronic acid (1 - 3 equivalents, preferably 1 equivalents) and an inorganic base (cesium carbonate or sodium carbonate) (preferably cesium carbonate) (3 - 8 equivalents, preferably 3 equivalents) is added an organic solvent (such as 1,2-dimethoxyethane, dioxane or DMF; preferably 1,2-dimethoxyethane) and water mixture (about 10: 1 to 1: 1 ratio; preferably 4: 1 ratio). The mixture is degassed before adding a palladium catalyst (such as tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, l,l'-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene palladium dichloride or bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride; preferably l,l'-bis(diphenylphosphino) ferrocene palladium dichloride) (2 - 10 mol %, preferably 5 mol %). The reaction mixture is heated at 100 - 2000C (preferably about 1200C) for a period of 20 - 60 minutes (preferably 30 minutes) in a microwave reactor. Upon completion of the reaction, the mixture is concentrated to dryness, dissolved in a suitable organic solvent (such as EtOAc, or DCM), and washed with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO3, dried over an appropriate drying reagent (such as MgSO4, or Na2SO4) and concentrated to dryness to give the crude product. The crude product is purified via flash chromatography to afford the desired product.
Exemplification of General Procedure T:
Preparation of (1R,3R )-methyl l-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-3-(4- vinylphenyl)cyclopentanecarboxy late
To a 60-mL microwave vial was suspended (]R,3R)-methy\ l-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-
3-(4-bromophenyl)cyclopentanecarboxylate (1.1 g, 2.54 mmol) and 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-vinyl- 1,3,2-dioxaboroIane (0.431 g, 2.80 mmol) and Cs2CO3 (2.487 g, 7.63 mmol) in DME (30 ml) and Water (7.50 ml). The reaction vessel was purged with nitrogen for 5 minutes. PdCl2(dppf) (0.186 g, 0.254 mmol) was added and the reaction vessel was purged with nitrogen one more time. The reaction mixture was heated to 120 0C in microwave for 30 minutes. The product ((lR,3R)-methyl l-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-3-(4-vinylphenyl)cyclopentanecarboxylate (705 mg, 1.858 mmol, 73.0 % yield)) was isolated by flash chromatography as a lightly colored oil. LCMS (Table 1, Method b) R, = 2.94 min; m/z: 380.43 (M+H)+.
General Procedure U: Hvdroboration reaction of an alkene
To a stirred and ice-bath cooled solution of an alkene in an organic solvent (preferably tetrahydrofuran) is added 9-BBN (1 - 8 equivalents, preferably 4 equivalents) dropwise. The reaction mixture is monitored by TLC to ensure complete conversion to boronate. After the reaction is complete, the ice bath is removed and the reaction is left to stir at ambient temperature for a period of 4 - 24 hours (preferably 12 - 20 hours) under inert atmosphere. The reaction mixture is then cooled to about 0 0C and diluted with an organic solvent (such as methanol). An aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (about 4 - 12 equivalents, preferably 8 equivalents) and 30% w/v hydrogen peroxide solution (about 4 - 12 equivalents, preferably 8 equivalents) is then poured into the rection mixture. Stirring is continued for a period of 1 - 8 hours (preferably 2 hours). The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the resulting crude can be purified by flash chromatography to afford the desired product.
Exemplification of General Procedure U: Preparation of (i/?,3/?)-methyl l-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-3-(4-(2-hydroxyethyl)phenyl) cyclopentanecarboxylate
9-BBN (25 ml, 12.50 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred and cooled solution of (7/?,3Λ)-methyl l-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-3-(4-vinylphenyl)cyclopentanecarboxylate (0.682 g, 1.797 mmol) in THF (15 mL). The reaction mixture was checked by TLC to ensure complete conversion to boronate. Once complete the ice bath was removed and stirring was continued overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0 0C and methanol (20ml) was added. Aqueous NaOH (7.30 ml, 14.59 mmol) and H2O2 (1.522 ml, 14.90 mmol) were poured into the rection mixture. Stirring was continued for 2 hours. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the product purified by FCC to afford (lR,3R)-methyl l-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-3-(4-(2- hydroxyethyl)phenyl)cyclopentanecarboxylate (0.507 g, 1.276 mmol, 71.0 % yield) as colorless oil. LCMS (Table 1, Method b) R, = 2.53 min; m/z: 398.30 (MH-H)+.
General Procedure V: Deprotection of a Cbz group from an amine
A Cbz-protected amine dissolved in an organic solvent (such as methanol, ethanol or ethyl acetate; preferably ethanol) is added to a slurry of Pearlman's Catalyst (2 -10 mol %, preferably 5 mol %) in an organic solvent (such as methanol, ethanol or ethyl acetate; preferably ethanol). The hydrogen gas is bubbled through the reaction for about 5 minutes. The reaction is stirred under the atmosphere of hydrogen for a period of 1 - 48 hours (preferably 2 - 24 hours). The progress of the reaction is monitored via LCMS. The resulting crude reaction mixture is filtered through Celite® and the filtrate is concentrated in vacuo to yield crude product, which can be further purified via column chromatography or used as is for the next step.
Exemplification of General Procedure V:
Preparation of (lR,3R)-methyl l-amino-3-(4-(2-(3- methoxyphenoxy)ethyl)phenyl)cyclopentanecar boxylate
A solution of (//?,3/?)-methyl l-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-3-(4-(2-(3-methoxyphenoxy) ethyOphenyOcyclopentanecarboxylate (0.266 g, 0.528 mmol) in EtOH (2.0 ml) was added to a slurry of Pearlman's Catalyst (0.019 g, 0.026 mmol) in EtOH (5.28 ml). Hydrogen gas was then bubbled through the reaction mixture for 2-3 minutes. The resulting mixture was stirred under the atmosphere of hydrogen overnight. The crude mixture was filtered through Celite® and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to yield (lR,3R)-methyl l-amino-3-(4-(2-(3-methoxyphenoxy)ethyl) phenyl)cyclopentanecar boxylate (157 mg, 0.425 mmol) as colorless oil.
LCMS (Table 1, Method b) R1 = 1.82 min; m/z: 370.40 (M+H)+.
General Procedure W: Synthesis of an alpha-beta unsaturated ketone
An organometalic reagent (1-3 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalents) is added to a solution of a beta-alkoxy enone in an organic solvent (preferably THF) at about -78 °C-room temperature (preferably 0 0C). Following the addition the reaction mixture is allowed to warm to about room temperature. After Ih IN HCl is added until a pH of 1 is obtained. The reaction mixture is taken through an aqueous work-up and the crude product can be purified by chromatography.
Exemplification of General Procedure W: Preparation of 3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclohex-2-enone
To a suspension of magnesium (1.477 g, 60.8 mmol) in THF (56 mL) was added 1-bromo- 4-octylbenzene (15.00 g, 55.7 mmol). After stirring for about 6h the reaction mixture was added with filtering to a solution of 3-ethoxycyclohex-2-enone (7.10 g, 50.6 mmol) in THF (28.0 mL) at 0 0C. Following the addition the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. After Ih IN HCl was added until a pH of 1 was obtained. The reaction mixture was diluted with Et2O and the organic layer was separated, washed with NaHCO3, and brine, dried with Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel (EtOAc/Hep) to provide 3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclohex-2 -enone (9.5 g, 33.4 mmol, 65.9 % yield) as a colorless oil.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R1 = 4.53 min; m/z: 285 (M-H)-; IH NMR (400 MHz, DMSO- d6) 5 7.57 (d, 2H), 7.25 (d, 2H), 6.34 (s, IH), 2.76 (dd, 2H), 2.60 (dd, 2H), 2.40 (dd, 2H), 2.03 (dddd, 2H), 1.58-1.55 (m, 2H), 1.27-1.24 (m, 10H), 0.85 (t, 3H).
General Procedure X: Addition of an organometallic reagent to an ester
To a solution of an ester in an organic solvent (preferably THF) at about -78 °C-room temperature (preferably 0 0C) is added an organometallic reagent (2-10 equivalents, preferably 5 equivalents). After about 2h the reaction mixture is quenched with water and the crude product is extracted into a suitable organic solvent (preferably ether). The crude product can be purified by chromatography.
Exemplification of General Procedure X:
Preparation of 2-((lR^R)-l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)propan-2-ol
To a solution of (lR,3R)-methyl l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentanecarboxylate (640 mg, 1.931 mmol) in THF (20 mL) at 0 0C was added a 3M solution of methylmagnesium iodide (3.22 mL, 9.65 mmol) in THF. After 2h water was added to the reaction mixture resulting in an emulsion. The reaction mixture was diluted with Et2O (100 mL) and water (100 mL). To the emulsion was added Rochelle's salt (approx. 5g). The resulting emulsion was sonicated for 15 min. The organic layer was removed. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et2O (100 mL) sonicating for 15 min to break up the emulsion. The combined organic layers were dried (Na2SO4) filtered and cone, in vacuo. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel (40 g) eluting with DCM:MeOH:HOAc:H2O (900:90:9: 1). The fractions containing the product were combined and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was diluted with water and lyophilized to provide 2- ((lR,3R)-l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)propan-2-ol, Acetic Acid salt (265 mg, 0.677 mmol, 35.1 % yield)
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) Rt = 3.28 min; m/z: 333 (M-H)-; IH NMR (400 MHz, DMSO- dβ) δ 7.15 (d, 2H), 7.08 (d, 2H), 5.30 (bs, 3H), 3.40-3.25 (m, IH), 2.52-2.50 (m, 2H), 2.20-2.05 (m, 2H), 1.90-1.78 (m, 4H), 1.70-1.60 (m, IH), 1.51-1.49 (m, 3H), 1.40-1.30 (m, IH), 1.30-1.25 (m, 10H), 1.17 (s, 6H), 0.85 (t, 3H).
General Procedure Y: Conversion of a tertiary alcohol to an alkane
To a slurry of silica gel and a lewis acid (preferably copper sulfate hydrate) in an organic solvent (preferably toluene) is added a tertiary alcohol. The reaction mixture is heated to about 50-200 0C (preferably 100 0C). After about 2 days a dehydrating reagent (preferably Na2SO4) is added. After about lday the reaction mixture is filtered. The resulting alkene is added to a slurry of a metal catalyst (preferably palladium hydroxide on carbon) in an organic solvent (preferably methanol). Hydrogen is bubbled through the solution for about 5 min and an atmosphere of hydrogen is maintained via balloon. After 15h the reaction mixture is filtered and concentrated in vacuo to provide the alkane. Exemplification of General Procedure Y:
Preparation of (5R,7R)-7-(4-(7-methyloctyl)phenyl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one
To a slurry of silica gel (Ig) and copper sulfate hydrate (Ig) in toluene (10 mL) was added (5R,7R)-7-(4-(7-hydroxy-7-methyloctyl)phenyl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (230 mg, 0.640 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated to 100 0C. After 2 days Na2SO4 (approx. 500 mg) was added. After an additional lday at 100 0C the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered, rinsing with EtOAc. The resulting alkene was added to a slurry of palladium hydroxide on carbon (4.49 mg, 0.032 mmol) in MeOH (10.00 mL). Hydrogen was bubbled through the solution for 5 min and an atmosphere of hydrogen was maintained via balloon. After 15h the reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude alkane was purified by chromatography on silica gel (EtOAc/Hep) to provide (5R,7R)-7-(4-(7-methyloctyl)phenyl)-3-oxa-l- azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (120 mg, 0.349 mmol, 54.6 % yield) as a colorless solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ 8.06 (s, IH), 7.13 (d, 2H), 7.08 (d, 2H), 4.26 (d, IH), 4.19 (d, IH), 3.23-3.16 (m, IH), 2.55-2.50 (m, 2H), 2.16-2.00 (m, 3H), 1.85-1.75 (m, 2H), 1.60-1.45 (m, 4H), 1.3-1.2 (m, 6H), 1.15-1.10 (m, 2H), 0.84 (d, 6H).
General Procedure Z: Hydration of an alkyne
An alkyne is dissolved in formic acid and heated to about 50-120 0C (preferably 80 0C). After about 4 h the reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water and heated to about 50-120 0C (preferably 80 0C). After about 4h the reaction mixture is purified by RP HPLC.
Exemplification of General Procedure Z:
Preparation of 1 -(4-(( lR,3R)-3-amino-3-(hydroxymethyl)cyclopentyl)phenyl)-5-phenylpentan- 1 - one, Acetic Acid salt
((lR,3R)-l-amino-3-(4-(5-phenylpent-l-ynyl)phenyl)cyclopentyl)methanol (900 mg, 2.70 mmol) was dissolved in formic acid (20 mL) and heated to about 80 0C. After 4h the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water (10 mL) and reheated to about 80 0C. After 4h the reaction mixture was purified by RP HPLC. Concentration of the fractions containing the desired product provided l-(4-((lR,3R)-3-amino-3- (hydroxymethyl)cyclopentyl)phenyl)-5-phenylpentan-l-one, Acetic Acid (320 mg, 0.778 mmol, 28.8 % yield) as an off white foam.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R1 = 2.19 min; m/z: 352 (M-H) ; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSOd6) δ 7.87 (d, 2H), 7.36 (d, 2H), 7.29-7.15 (m, 5H), 3.46-3.35 (m, IH), 3.32 (dd, 2H), 3.00 (dd, 2H), 2.61 (dd, 2H), 2.13-2.08 (m, IH), 1.93-1.76 (m , 5H), 1.69-1.60 (m , 6H), 1.51-1.41 (m, IH).
General Procedure AA; Synthesis of an alkylether
To a strong base (preferably sodium hydride) 0.5-2 equivalents (preferably 1 equivalent) in a suitable solvent (preferably DMF) is added an alkylating agent 1-5 equivalents (preferably 1.2 equivalent) followed by a solution of an alcohol. After the reaction is substantively complete the reaction mixture is taken through an aqueous work up and purified by chromatography or distillation.
Exemplification of General Procedure AA: Preparation of 7-methoxyhept-l-yne
To a slurry of sodium hydride (7.86 g, 197 mmol) in DMF (100 mL) was added methyl iodide (12.29 mL, 197 mmol) followed by a solution of hept-6-yn-l-ol (24.5 g, 197 mmol) in DMF (50 mL). Following the addition the reaction was monitored by TLC. After 2h additional methyl iodide (6 mL, 50 mmol) was added followed by sodium hydride (1 g, 25 mmol) portions. At Ih intervals additional sodium hydride (1 g, 25 mmol) portions was added until no alcohol remained as indicated by TLC. Et2O (50 mL) and water (100 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and the layers were separated. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried using Na2SO4, filtered and distilled (145-155 0C) to provide 7-methoxyhept-l-yne (18 g, 121 mmol, 61.7 % yield) as a colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ. 3.28 (t, 2H), 3.19 (s, 3H), 2.71 (t, IH), 2.13 (dddd, 2H), 1.51- 1.33 (m, 6H).
General Procedure BB: Synthesis of an N-aryl prolinol
To a microwave reaction vial is added l,4-dibromobutan-2-ol (0.5-2 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalent), an aniline (0.5-2 equivalents, preferably 1.0 equivalent), potassium carbonate (0.5-2 equivalents, preferably 1.1 equivalent) and a polar protic solvent (preferably water). The reaction vial is heated in a microwave at (50-200 watts, preferably 100 watt), (50-200 0C, preferably 120 0C, (100-200 psi, preferably 150 psi), (ramp time of 2-10 min, preferably 5 min) and (hold time of 10-30 min, preferably 20 min). After cooling to rt an organic solvent (preferably EtOAc) is added to the reaction mixture. The organic layer is removed and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product is purified by flash chromatography on silica gel.
Exemplification of General Procedure BB:
Preparation of l-(4-octylphenyl)pyrrolidin-3-ol
To 10 microwave vials were added l,4-dibromobutan-2-ol (0.375 mL, 2.75 mmol), 4- octylaniline (0.572 mL, 2.5 mmol), potassium carbonate (0.380 g, 2.75 mmol) and water (3 mL). Each vial was heated in a CEM microwave at 100 watt, 120 0C, 150 psi, ramp time 5 min and hold time 20 min. After cooling to room temperature EtOAc (1 mL) was added to each vial. After thorough mixing the organic layers were removed, combined and concentrated in vacuo. The product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (eluting with EtO Ac/Hep) to provide 1- (4-octylphenyl)pyrrolidin-3-ol (3.7 g, 13.43 mmol, 53.7 % yield) as a white solid which was stored under nitrogen in a sealed flask.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) Rt = 4.88 min; m/z: 276 (M-H)"; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ. 6.95 (d, 2H), 6.41 (d, 2H), 4.88 (d, IH), 4.37 (m, IH), 3.36 (dd, IH), 3.3-3.17 (m, 3H), 3.01 (dd, IH), 2.43 (t, 2H), 2.06-1.98(m, IH), 1.89-1.84(m, IH), 1.52-1.47 (m, 2H), 1.29-1.24 (m, 10H), 0.85 (t, 3H).
General Procedure CC: Oxidation of an alcohol to the ketone
To a solution of an alcohol in DMSO and an organic solvent (preferably toluene) at -10-10 0C (preferably 0 0C) is added a weak organic base (preferably pyridine, 2-5 equivalents, preferably 3.5 equivalents), followed by a carbodiimide (preferably DCC, 1-3 equivalents, preferably 1.75 equivalents), and an organic acid (preferably TFA, 0.5-2 equivalents, preferably 1 equivalents). Following the addition the reaction mixture is allowed to warm to about room temperature. After about 5 h saturated NaCHCO3 is added to the reaction mixture and the suspension was filtered. The filtrate is partially concentrated in vacuo and the resulting dark oil is extracted with heptane. The heptane extracts are purified by silica gel chromatography.
Exemplification of General Procedure CC:
Preparation of l-(4-octylphenyl)pyrrolidin-3-one
To a solution of l-(4-octylphenyl)pyrrolidin-3-ol (3.7 g, 13.43 mmol) in DMSO (50 ml) and Toluene (50.0 ml) at 0 0C was added pyridine (3.80 ml, 47.0 mmol), DCC (4.85 g, 23.51 mmol), and TFA (1.035 ml, 13.43 mmol). Following the addition the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. After 5 h saturated NaCHCO3 was added to the reaction mixture and the suspension was filtered. The filtrate was partially concentrated in vacuo and the resulting dark oil was extracted with heptane. The heptane extracts were purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with EtOAc/Hep to provide l-(4-octylphenyl)pyrrolidin-3-one (3.1 g, 11.34 mmol, 84 % yield) as a colorless solid.
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^5) δ. 7.03 (d, 2H), 6.61 (d, 2H), 3.61 (s, 2H), 3.56 (t, 2H), 2.66 (t, 2H), 2.47 (t, 2H), 1.55-1.48 (m, 2H), 1.30-1.20 (m, 10H), 0.85 (t, 3H).
General Procedure DD: Reductive Amination on a Ketone To a ketone dissolved in a suitable solvent (such as dichloromethane, methanol, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethylformamide, preferably methanol) is added an amine (1 - 2 equivalents, preferably 1 equivalent), acetic acid (1 - 5 equivalents, preferably 3 equivalents) and resin-bound sodium cyanoborohydride (1 - 5 equivalents, preferably 3 equivalents). The reaction mixture is stirred under an inert atmosphere at room temperature for a period of 12 - 72 hours (preferably 48 hours). Reaction is then filtered to remove the resin-bound borohydride and the resin washed 3 x with a suitable solvent (such as dichloromethane, methanol, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethylformamide, preferably methanol). The filtrate is collected, concentrated and chromatographed to give the desired product.
Exemplification of General Procedure DD:
Preparation of MethyI-[3-(4-octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentyl]-amino}-acetic acid acid
To 3-(4-octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanone (0.200 g, 0.734 mmol) dissolved in methanol (4.0 mL) was added methylamiono-acetic acid (0.065 g, 0.734 mmol), acetic acid (0.125 mL, 2.20 mmol) and resin-bound sodium cyanoborohydride (0.941 g, 2.20 mmol, 2.34 mmol/g loading). The reaction mixture was stirred under an inert atmosphere at room temperature for 72 hours. The reaction was then filtered to remove the resin-bound borohydride and the resin was washed with MeOH (3 x 10 ml_). The filtrate was collected, concentrated and purified by by RP-HPLC (A = 5OmM ammonium acetate, B = acetonitrile; 30-80% B over 30.0 min (21.0 mL/min flow rate); 21.2 x 250 mm Thermo Hyperprep C 18 column, 8 μm particles) to give Methyl-[3-(4-octyl-phenyl)- cyclopentyl] -amino} -acetic acid as a white solid (0.112 g, 43%)
LCMS (Table 1, Method f) R, = 1.94 min; m/z: 344 (M-H)", m/z: 346 (M+H)+
TABLES UTILIZING GENERAL PROCEDURES Table A. Examples following general procedures A, B, C, D, E, F, H (Scheme 1)
Boronic acid
<y° General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A B C D
Alkyne
General General Procedure Procedure Procedure
E F H
Table B. Examples following general procedures A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H (Scheme 1) Boronic acid General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A B C D
Alkyne
General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
E F G H
Table C. Examples following general procedures A, I, J, E, F, H (Scheme 2)
^v ,o Boronic acid
* — ' General General General Genera!
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure A I J E
Alkyne
General
Procedure
F H
Table D. Examples following general procedures A, I, J, E, F, G, H (Scheme 2)
^v^O Boronic acid ' — ' General General General General Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure A I J E
Alkyne
General General
Procedure Procedure
F G
Table E. Examples following general procedures A, I, J, E, H, K, L, M, N (Scheme 3)
^\^Q Boronic acid
\ — ' General General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A I J E H
Alcohol
General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
K L M N I)-
}- } -
} -
-cyclopenty 1 } -
}- }- }- }- }-
Table F. Examples following general procedures O (Scheme 4)
The letters in parentheses below the amino-alcohol precursors indicate the General Procedure by which the amino-alcohol precursor was made.
Table G. Examples following general procedures P (Scheme 5)
The letters in parentheses below the ester precursors indicate the General Procedure by which the ester was made.
General
Procedure
P
Table H. Examples following general procedures A, I, J, E, F, G, H, K, L, M, N (Scheme 11)
^^.Q Boronic acid \ — ' General General General General General Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure A I J E H
Alkyne Alcohol
General General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
K F G L M
Table I. Examples following general procedures A, B, C, D, E, S, T, U, M, V, H (Scheme 7)
<f^° Boronic acid
VJ General General General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A B C D E S
Table J. Intermediates prepared following general procedure AA (Scheme 8)
alkylating agent
R1 -OH R1 -O
General R2
Procedure
AA
Ex Alkylting 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-
Alcohol Product
# agent dά δ. 3.53-3.46 (m, 4H), 2.29 pent-4-yn-l-
J.3 iodoethane \^α (dddd( 2H), 1.94 (t, IH), 1.79 ol (dddd, 2H), 1.20 (t, 3H).
Product: 5-ethoxypent-l-yne
2- 3- 6. 4.23 (d, 2H), 3.71 (ddd,
J.4 methoxyetha bromopro "O' 2H), 3.59 (ddd, 2H), 3.41 (s, nol p-l-yne 3H), 2.45 (t, IH).
Product: 3-(2-methoxyethoxy)prop- 1 -yne hex-5-ynyl
4- δ. 3.47 (sep, 1 H), 3.33 (t, 2H), 2.71, (t, 1), 2.14 (ddd,
J.5 propan-2-ol methylben zenesulfon 2h), 1.54-1.43 (m, 4H), 1.04 ate (d, 6H).
Product: 4-propoxybut-l-yne
Table K. Examples following general procedures BB, CC, B, D, E, H (Scheme 9)
aniline General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
BB CC B D
Table L. Examples following general procedures A, I, J, E, H, K, F, M, N (Scheme 10)
Table M. Examples following general procedures D (Scheme 12)
The letters in parentheses below the ester precursors indicate the General Procedure by which the ester was made.
Table N. Examples following general procedures A, F, G, D (Scheme 13)
Table O. Examples following general procedures A, B, C, D, E, F (Scheme 14)
^c Boronic acid
\_v General General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A B C D E
Alkyne
General Procedure
F
Table P. Examples following general procedures A, B, C, D, E, F, G (Scheme 15)
Boronic acid
<y° General General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A B C D E
Table Q. Examples following general procedures A, I, J, E, H, K, L, M, N (Scheme 3)
Cr" Boronic acid i
General General General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
A I J E H
General General General
Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure
K L M N
Table R. Examples following general procedures O (Scheme 4)
The letters in parentheses below the amino-alcohol precursors indicate the General Procedure by which the amino-alcohol precursor was made.
PREPARATION OF ADDITIONAL MOLECULES (NOT IN TABLES): Preparation of 4-Benzyloxy-N-prop-2-ynyl-butyramide
A solution of 4-Benzyloxy-butyric acid (1.0Og, 5.15 mmol) and Propargylamine (284 mg, 5.15 mmol) in DMF (10.3 ml) was treated with Diisopropylethylamine (0.90 ml, 5.15 mmol), Hydroxybenzotriazole (788 mg, 5.15 mmol) and EDC (665 mg, 5.15 mmol) at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature under nitrogen. The reaction was concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude product is taken up in Ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried using Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to yield 4-Benzyloxy-N-prop-2-ynyl- butyramide (1.02 g, 86%) as a viscous oil.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) min., m/z:(M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^6) δ. 8.24 (broad t, IH), 7.30 (m, 5H), 4.43 (s, 2H), 3.82 (m, 2H), 3.40 (t, 2H), 3.31 (s, IH), 2.16 (t, 2H), 1.76 (m, 2H) Preparation of 2-(3-Benzyloxy-propyl)-5-methyl-oxazole
A solution of 4-Benzyloxy-N-prop-2-ynyl-butyramide (500 mg, 2.16 mmol) in acetonitrile (22 ml) was treated with Gold (III) chloride (32.8 mg, 0.108 mmol) at room temperature. The reaction was heated at 500C for 8 hours then was allowed to stir at room temperature overnight. The reaction was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified on silica gel using 1 : 1 / heptane : ethyl acetate as eluant. Fractions that contained product were combined and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield 2-(3-Benzyloxy-propyl)-5-methyl-oxazole (405 mg, 81%) as a clear oil. LCMS (Table 1, Method a) min., /n/z:(M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSOd6) δ. 7.32 (m, 5H), 6.67 s, IH), 4.45 (s, 2H), 3.47 (t, 2H), 2.73 (t, 2H), 2.23 (s, 3H), 1.92 (m, 2H) Preparation of 3-(5-Methyl-oxazol-2-yl)-propan-l-ol
A solution of 2-(3-Benzyloxy-propyl)-5-methyl-oxazole (675 mg, 2.92 mmol) in ethanol (15 ml) containing a suspension of 10% Pd on C (63.9 mg, 0.06 mmol) was hydrogenated overnight at room temperature. The catalyst was removed by filtration through Celite®, then the filtrate was concentrated and the residue was purified on silica gel using 1 : 1 / heptane : ethyl acetate and then ethyl acetate as eluants. Fractions that contained product were combined and concentrated under reduced pressure to yield 3-(5-Methyl-oxazol-2-yl)-propan-l-ol (242 mg, 59%) as an oil. LCMS (Table 1, Method a) 1.85 min., m/z: 142 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ. 6.64 (s, IH), 4.50 (t, IH), 3.41 (m, 2H), 2.67 (t, 2H), 2.22 (s, 3H), 1.76 (m, 2H)
Preparation of 5-methoxy-pentan-l-ol
To a flask charged with ((5-methoxypentyloxy)methyl)benzene (4.25 g, 0.0204 mol), palladium on carbon (0.5 g) was added ethanol (40 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature under hydrogen (balloon) for 1 hour. The crude mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite®, concentrated, and dried under vacuum to give 5-methoxy-pentan-l-ol (2.40 g, 100%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ 4.32 (t, 3H), 3.37 (m, 2H), 3.31 (m, IH), 3.21 (s, 3H), 1.39-1.49 (m, 4H), 1.25-1.32 (m, 2H)
Preparation of 3-(3-methoxy-phenyI)-propan-l-ol
A solution of 3-(3-methoxyphenyl)propanoic acid (2.0Og, 11.10 mmol) in THF (2.0 mL) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of borane-tetrahydrofuran complex (24.42 mL, 24.42 mmol) so as to maintain reaction temperature below 35 0C. The mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature overnight. Methanol was added dropwise to the stirred mixture until visible reaction had ceased. An additional 20 mL of methanol was added and the reaction was stirred for 4 hours. The crude mixture was concentrated, filtered and purified by silica gel chromatography (1: 1 heptane:EtOAc as eluant). Fractions containing product were combined and concentrated to give 3- (3-methoxy-phenyl)-propan-l -ol as an oil.
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSCW6) δ 7.17 (m, IH), 6.74 (m, 3H), 4.44 (t, IH), 3.72 (s, 3H), 3.40 (m, 2H), 2.57 (m, 2H), 1.69 (m, 2H)
Preparation of 3-(3,5-dimethoxy-phenyl)-propan-l-ol
A solution of 3-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)propanoic acid (2.00 g, 9.51 mmol) in THF (2.0 mL) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of borane-tetrahydrofuran complex (20.93 mL, 20.93 mmol) so as to maintain reaction temperature below 35 0C. The mixture was allowed to stir overnight at room temperature. Methanol was added dropwise to the stirred mixture until visible reaction had ceased. An additional 20 mL of methanol was added and the reaction was stirred for 4 hours. The crude mixture was concentrated, filtered and purified by silica gel chromatography (1: 1 heptane:EtOAc as eluant). Fractions containing product were combined and concentrated to give 3- (3,5-dimethoxy-phenyl)-propan-l-ol as an oil.
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^5) 5 6.34 (d, 2H), 6.29 (t, IH), 4.43 (t, IH), 3.71 (s, 6H), 3.40 (m, 2H), 2.57 (m, 2H), 1.69 (m, 2H).
Preparation of 2-(4-fluoro-phenoxy)-ethanol
A solution of 4-fluorophenol (2.00 g, 17.84 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was added dropwise to a stirred suspension of NaH in DMF (2.0 mL) at around 10 0C. Ethyl bromoacetate (2.483 mL, 22.30 mmol) was added dropwise and then the reaction mixture was allowed to warm up to room temperature for 4 hours. The solvent was removed under vacuum and the residue was dissolved in methylene chloride and washed 2 times with water, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to dryness. The crude product was purified on silica gel using (4: 1 heptane:EtOAc as eluent) to give ethyl 2-(4- βuorophenoxy)acetate (3.12 g, 95 %).
1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-^5) δ 7.09 (m, 2H), 6.94 (m, 2H), 4.84 (t, IH), 3.94 (t, 2H), 3.69 (m,
2H) Ethyl 2-(4-fluorophenoxy)acetate (3.12g, 15.74 mmol) was dissolved in diethyl ether (50ml) and cooled to about 0 0C. Lithium aluminum hydride (1.792 g, 47.2 mmol) was added in portions while maintaining reaction temperature below 35 0C. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for one hour. The crude reaction was diluted with ether (50 mL) then cooled in an ice bath and quenched by dropwise addition of water (6.1 mL), then 2 M NaOH (12.2 mL), then water (6.1 mL). The mixture was filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified on silica gel (4: 1 heptane:EtOAc as eluant) to give 2-(4-fluoro-phenoxy)-ethanol (1.36 g, 55 %). 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSOd6) δ 7.08-7.13 (m, 2H), 6.92-6.96 (m, 2H), 4.84 (t, IH), 3.95 (t, 2H), 3.69 (m, 2H).
Preparation of 4-{2-[4-((//?,5/?)-3-amino-3-hydroxymethyl-cyclopentyl)-phenoxy]-ethyl}- phenoi
To a solution of ((7/?,_?/?)-l-amino-3-(4-(4-(benzyloxy)phenethoxy)phenyl)cyclopentyl) methanol (250 mg, 0.599 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) was added Pd/C 10% (20 mg, 0.188 mmol). The mixture was flushed with hydrogen and hydrogenate with a balloon for about 16 hours. The crude mixture was filtered, concentrated and the residue was triturated with ether. The solid was collected and dried under vacuum at 50 0C to give 4-(2-(4-((77?,3Λ)-3-amino-3- (hydroxymethyl)cyclopentyl)phenoxy)ethyl)phenol (169 mg, 86 %) as a white solid. LCMS (Table 1, Method b) R1 = 1.75 min; m/z: 328 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSOd6) 5 7.10 (m, 4H), 6.81 (dd, 2H), 6.68 (dd, 2H), 4.63 (b, IH), 4.05 (t, 2H), 3.31 (s, 3H), 2.88 (t, 2H), 1.98- 2.07 (m, IH), 1.77-1.84 (m, IH), 1.30-1.65 (m, 5H).
Preparation of 4-((7S)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-lj3-diazaspiro[4.4]nonan-7-yl)benzonitrile
A suspension of (7S)-7-(4-bromophenyl)-3-methyl-l,3-diazaspiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione
(General procedures A, B, C) (0.500 g, 1.547 mmol) in anhydrous NMP (4.00 ml) was degassed by evacuating the reaction vial then refilling with N2 a couple of times. To this suspension was added zinc (1.012 mg, 0.015 mmol), dppf (0.027 g, 0.048 mmol), zinc cyanide (0.145 g, 1.238 mmol), and Pd2(dba)3 (0.021 g, 0.023 mmol) at ambient temperature. The resulting mixture was heated to 120 0C for about 16 hours. The crude material was filtered through Celite®. The filtrate was taken up in water (7OmL) and ethyl acetate (10OmL). The organic phase was washed with water (5OmL x 2) and brine (5OmL), dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to yield 4-((7S)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-l,3- diazaspiro[4.4]nonan-7-yl)benzonitrile (0.44 g, 0.20 mmol) as light brown solid. LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R1 = 2.04 min; m/z: 270.15 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol- d4) 5 ppm 3.52-3.39 (m, IH), 2.10-1.85 (m, 3H), 2.31-2.15 (m, 3H), 7.69-7.64 (m, 2H), 7.50 (t, J = 8.45 Hz, 2H), 2.96 (d, J = 2.91 Hz, 3H), 2.59-2.34 (m, IH).
Preparation of (Z)-N'-hydroxy-4-{(7S)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-l,3-diazaspiro[4.4]nonan-7- yl } benzimidamide
4-((7S)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-l,3-diazaspiro[4.4]nonan-7-yl)benzonitrile (0.88 g, 3.27 mmol) was suspended in ethanol (20 ml). To this was added hydroxylamine (0.240 ml, 3.59 mmol) as 50% weight solution in water, and the reaction was heated to 60 °C under an atmosphere of nitrogen for about 20 hours. The reaction mixture was left to cool down to ambient temperature. Solvent was partially removed. The resulting white precipitate was filtered, rinsed with cold ethanol and vacuum-dried to afford (Z)-N'-hydroxy-4-{(7S)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-l,3-diazaspiro[4.4]nonan -7-yl}benzimidamide as light brown solid (1.12 g, 3.20 mmol).
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) R, = 1.47 min; m/z: 303.33 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol- <#) δ ppm 2.96 (d, J = 3.16 Hz, 3H), 2.43-2.33 (m, IH), 3.39 (ddd, J = 18.31, 11.00, 7.39 Hz, IH), 7.36-7.30 (m, 2H), 7.58 (d, J = 8.23 Hz, 2H), 2.29-1.87 (m, 6H).
Preparation of (7S)-7-(4-(5-(44sobutylphenyl)-l,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)phenyl)-3-methyl-l,3- diazaspiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione
A solution of 4-isobutylbenzoic acid (0.130 g, 0.728 mmol), EDC (0.139 g, 0.728 mmol) and HOBt hydrate (0.111 g, 0.728 mmol) in DMF (1.0 ml) was stirred at ambient temperature for 1 - 1.5 hours. To the mixture was added (Z)-N'-hydroxy-4-{(7S)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-l,3- diazaspiro[4.4]nonan-7-yl } benzimidamide (0.200 g, 0.662 mmol) as solution in 1.0 ml DMF at ambient temperature. The resulting mixture was heated to about 140 0C for additional 2 hours. Solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude product was purified on a Prep HPLC system using 20 - 99% 50 mM NH4OAc buffer in acetonitrile at 81 mL/min to afford (7S)-7-(4-(5-(4- isobutylphenyl)-l,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)phenyl)-3-methyl-l,3-diazaspiro[4.4]nonane-2,4- dione (0.062 g, 0.139 mmol) as light brown solid.
LCMS (Table 1, Method a) Rt = 4.48 min; mJz: 445.39 (M+H)+; 1H NfMR (400 MHz, Methanol- d4) δ ppm 7.53-7.39 (m, 4H), 8.15-8.06 (m, 4H), 3.52-3.41 (m, IH), 2.98 (d, J = 3.39 Hz, 3H), 2.61 (d, J = 7.22 Hz, 2H), 2.46-2.37 (m, IH), 2.35-2.20 (m, 3H), 2.07-1.90 (m, 3H), 0.95 (d, J = 6.62 Hz, 6H).
Preparation of (3S)-l-amino-3-(4-(5-(4-isobutylphenyl)-l,2,4-oxadiazol-3-y!)phenyI)-,/V- methylcyclopentanecarboxamide
N-
(7S)-7-(4-(5-(4-isobutylphenyl)-l,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)phenyl)-3-methyl-l,3- diazaspiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione (0.052 g, 0.117 mmol) was taken up in dioxane (1.0 ml). To this was added sodium hydroxide (1.0 ml, 2.000 mmol) as 2M solution. The resulting suspension was heated to 120 0C for about 70 hours, during which more sodium hydroxide solution was added to push the hydrolysis to completion. Heating was stopped and the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo. The resulting material was brought up in 1 - 2 mL DMSO and filtered. The filtrate was purified on a Prep HPLC system using 30 - 100% acetonitrile in 50 mM NH4OAc buffer at 21 mL/min to yield (3S)-l-amino-3-(4-(5-(4-isobutylphenyl)-l,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)phenyl)-N- methylcyclopentanecarboxamide (0.017 g, 0.041 mmol) as off-white solid. LCMS (Table 1, Method b) R, = 1.76 min; m/z: 419.24 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) δ ppm 8.11 (dd, J = 9.86, 8.34 Hz, 4H), 7.44 (d, J = 8.17 Hz, 2H), 7.32 (d, J = 8.16 Hz, 2H), 7.80- 7.71 (m, IH), 3.56-3.36 (m, IH), 2.86 (d, J = 4.81 Hz, 3H), 2.65-2.52 (m, 4H), 2.35-2.23 (m, IH), 2.05-1.86 (m, 4H), 1.65-1.55 (m, IH), 0.94 (d, J = 6.61 Hz, 6H), 1.34-1.17 (m, IH).
Preparation of 2-(l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)acetic acid
3-(4-Octyl-phenyl)-cyclopentanone, malonic acid (0.076 g, 0.734 mmol), ammonium acetate (0.057 g, 0.734 mmol) were suspended in the mixture of ethanol (1.50 mL, 25.7 mmol) and methanol (0.50 mL, 12.36 mmol) in a 15-mL, 2-necked round-bottomed flask equipped with a condenser. The heterogeneous mixture was heated to reflux at 80 0C for about 24 hours. Heating was removed. The crude mixture was taken up in dichloromethane/water mixture (20 mL/20 mL). The resulting fine suspension was filtered, washed several times with water and dichloromethane, and vacuum-dried to yield 2-(l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)acetic acid (0.020 g, 0.060 mmol) as off-white solid.
LCMS (Table 1, Method b) R1 = 1.70 min; m/z: 332.30 (M+H)+; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.48 (d, J = 18.37 Hz, 3H), 7.17 (d, J = 8.01 Hz, 2H), 7.06 (d, J = 7.89 Hz, 2H), 3.54-3.00 (m, IH), 2.85 (d, J = 10.82 Hz, 2H), 2.49-2.44 (m, 2H), 2.32-2.17 (m, IH), 2.11-1.59 (m, 5H), 1.48 (s, 3H), 1.20 (d, J = 11.44 Hz, 10H), 0.80 (t, J = 6.72, 6.72 Hz, 3H)
Preparation of hept-6-yn-l-ol
To a round bottom flask equipped with a stirring bar under N2 was added LAH (3.61 g, 95 mmol) and anhydrous diethyl ether (300 ml). The mixture was cooled to 0 0C in an acetonitrile-dry ice bath, a solution of hept-6-ynoic acid (6.00 g, 47.6 mmol) in dry diethyl ether (60.1 ml) was added dropwise with vigorous stirring. The mixture was then allowed to warm to ambient temperature and stirred for an additional hour. Next, IM HCl solution (159 ml, 159 mmol) was added dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature over the weekend. The layers were then separated. The aqueous layer was back-extracted with diethyl ether (150 mL). The combined organic phase was wash with brine (15OmL), dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to yield 5.89 g of colorless liquid. The crude liquid was purified via Analogix FCC system using Biotage RS 330g column, with a gradient of 0-50% ether/pet, ether over 10 min. at 40 mL/min. then held at 50% for 50 min. Fractions containing product were combined and concentrated to yield hept-6-yn- l-ol (4.94 g, 44.0 mmol) as colorless liquid. The title compound was also prepared according to procedure described by B. W. Gung et al, Tetrahedron: Asymmetry, 2005, 16, 3107-3114. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-J6) δ ppm 3.66 (t, J = 6.32, 6.32 Hz, 2H), 2.26-2.17 (m, 2H), 1.98-1.92 (m, IH), 1.66-1.53 (m, 4H), 1.53-1.45 (m, 2H)
Preparation of 2-(3-methoxy-4-methylphenyl)ethanol
2-(3-methoxy-4-methylphenyl)acetic acid (I g, 5.55 mmol) was dissolved in Tetrahydrofuran (27.7 ml). A solution of borane tetrahydrofuran complex (12.21 ml, 12.21 mmol) was added slowly under nitrogen. The reaction was stirred for about 18 h. Methanol was slowly to quench the reaction. The mixture was rotovapped. More methanol was added. The mixture was rotovapped. This was repeat two more times. The solution was passed through a short pad of silica gel eluting with 1: 1 EtO Ac/heptane and then rotovapped to give 2-(3-methoxy-4-methylphenyl)ethanol (0.800 g, 4.81 mmol, 87 % yield) as a colorless oil: 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 7.07 (dd, IH), 6.73 (dd, IH), 6.69 (s, IH), 3.86 (t, 2H), 3.30 (s, 3H), 2.84 (t, 2H), 2.14 (s, 3H), 1.41 (s, IH)
Preparation of 3-(4-fluoro-3-methoxyphenyl)propan-l-ol
Ethyl 3-(4-fluoro-3-methoxyphenyl)propanoate (1.019 g, 4.50 mmol) was dissolved in THF (22.52 ml) under nitrogen. A solution of lithium aluminum hydride (4.50 ml, 9.01 mmol) was added slowly. TLC shows reaction done after about 10 min. Water (0.35 mL) was slowed added and then the mixture was stirred for 30 min. 1 N NaOH (1.05 mL) was added and the reaction was stired for 30 min. Additional water was added (0.35 mL) and the solution was stirred and then filtered. The cake was washed with ether and then rotovapped. Ether was added. The solution was dried over magnesium sulfate and then filtered and rotovapped. The solution was passed through silica gel with methylene chloride then ethyl acetate then rotovapped to give 3-(4-fluoro-3- methoxyphenyl)propan-l-ol (0.753 g, 4.09 mmol, 91 % yield) as a colorless oil: 1H NMR (400
MHz, CDCl3) S ppm 6.98 (dd, IH), 6.80 (dd, IH), 6.71 (ddd, IH), 3.89 (s, 3H), 3.68 (t, 2H), 2.68 (t, 2H), 1.94-1.82 (m, 2H), 1.33 (s, IH)
Preparation of 3-(2-methoxyphenyl)propan-l-ol
3-(2-methoxyphenyl)propanoic acid (1.0 g, 5.55 mmol) was dissolved in THF (27.7 ml).
A solution of borane tetrahydrofuran complex (12.21 ml, 12.21 mmol) was added slowly.
The reaction was stirred for about 4 h. Methanol was added and the solvents removed.
This process was repeated twice. The solution was passed through a short pad of silica gel with 1 : 1 ethyl acetate/heptane And then rotovapped to give 3-(2-methoxyphenyl)propan-l- ol (0.946 g, 5.69 mmol, 103 % yield) as a colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 7.19 (dt, IH), 7.15 (dd, IH), 6.90 (dt, IH), 6.86 (d, IH), 3.84 (s, 3H), 3.60 (t, 2H), 2.73 (t, 2H), 1.92-1.79 (m, 2H), 1.76 (s, IH),
Preparation of 2-(4-methoxy-3-methylphenyl)ethanol
2-(4-methoxy-3-methylphenyl)acetic acid (I g, 5.55 mmol) was dissolved in Tetrahydrofuran (27.7 ml). A solution of borane tetrahydrofuran complex (12.21 ml, 12.21 mmol) was added slowly under nitrogen. The reaction was stirred for about 18 h. Methanol was slowly added to quench the reaction The solution was rotovapped. More methanol was added. The solution was rotovapped. This was repeated twice. The solution was passed through a short pad of silica gel eluting with 1: 1 EtOAc/heptane and then rotovapped to give 2-(4-methoxy-3-methylphenyl)ethanol (0.986 g, 5.93 mmol, 107 % yield) as a colorless oil: 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 6 ppm 7.05 (m, IH), 7.04 (m, IH), 6.80 (m, IH), 3.85 (s, 3H), 3.84 (t, 2H), 2.81 (t, 2H), 2.25 (s, IH), 1.64 (s, IH)
Preparation of 3-(thiophen-2-yl)propan-l-ol
A solution of borane tetrahydrofuran complex (13.03 ml, 13.03 mmol) was added to THF (29.6 ml). 3-(thiophen-2-yl)propanoic acid (0.100 g, 0.640 mmol) was dissolved in THF (5 mL) and added slowly to the reaction. The solution was stirred overnight. Methanol was added and then the solution was rotovapped. More methanol was added and the solution wasrotovapped. This was repeated once. The solution was passed through a pad of silica gel eluting with ether and then ethyl acetate and then rotovapped to give 3-(thiophen-2-yl)propan-l-ol (0.820 g, 5.77 mmol, 97 % yield) as a light yellow oil: 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 7.12 (m, IH), 6.92 (dd, IH), 6.81 (m, IH), 3.71 (t, IH), 2.95 (t, IH), 2.02-1.87 (m, IH)
Scheme for preparation of furan analogs outlined below:
Preparation of l-(4-octylphenyl)but-3-en-l-ol
4-octylbenzaldehyde (10.0 g, 45.8 mmol) (Aldrich) was dissolved in THF (229 ml) under nitrogen. The reaction was cooled to about 0-5 0C in an ice bath. A solution of allylmagnesium bromide (48.1 ml, 48.1 mmol) (Aldrich) was added slowly and the reaction stirred for about 2 h. The reaction was quenched by the addition of saturated ammonium chloride followed by addition of ethyl acetate. The layers were separated and the aqeous extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to an off-white oil. The residue was dissolved in ether and dried over sodium sulfate and filtered. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure to provide l-(4-octylphenyl)but-3-en-l-ol (11.54 g, 44.3 mmol, 97 % yield) as a light yellow oil: LC/MS (method f) R, = 2.90 min.; MS m/z: 243.21 (M- water)+.
Preparation of tert-butyldimethyl(l-(4-octylphenyl)but-3-enyloxy)silane
l-(4-octylphenyl)but-3-en-l-ol (11.5 g, 44.2 mmol) and imidazole (3.16 g, 46.4 mmol) were combined in DMF (221 ml). Tert-butyldimethylchlorosilane (6.66 g, 44.2 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for about 72 h. The reaction was quench by addition of water and ethyl acetate (500 mL). The layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (2 x 100 mL). The combined ethyl acetate extracts were washed with 5% LiCl solution (3x). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to provide tert- butyldimethyl(l-(4-octylphenyl)but-3-enyloxy)silane (19.108 g, 51.0 mmol, 115 % yield) as a colorless oil. LC/MS (method 0 R. = 5.32, 3.89 min.; MS m/z: 243.21 (M-OTBDMS)+.
Preparation of 4-(4-octylphenyl)butane-l,2,4-trioI
Tert-butyIdimethyl(l-(4-octylphenyl)but-3-enyloxy)silane (19.108 g, 51.0 mmol) and NMO (7.17 g, 61.2 mmol) were combined in acetone (227 ml) and water (28.3 ml). Osmium tetroxide (32.0 ml, 2.55 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for about 2 h. TLC in 1: 1 EtO Ac/heptane showed reaction complete. Sodium thiosulfate (8.06 g, 51.0 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for about 3 h resulting in a coarse black precipitate. The solution was poured over 150 mL of silica gel and washed product through thoroughly or washed product through?with ethyl acetate until no more product was eluting as shown by TLC (-700 mL EtOAc). The resulting 4-(Tert- butyIdimethylsilyloxy)-4-(4-octylphenyl)butane-l,2-diol (14.68 g, 35.9 mmol) and molecular sieves (5 g) (Aldrich) were combined in THF (359 ml) under nitrogen. TBAF (35.9 ml, 35.9 mmol) (Aldrich) was added and the reaction stirred for about 16 h. The mixture was filtered and the solvents evaporated to provide an orange/brown oil. The oil was passed through a pad of silica gel (150 mL) and washed through with ethyl acetate. Product eluted slowly and took almost 2L of
EtOAc for all product to elute. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure to provide 4-(4- octylphenyl)butane-l,2,4-triol (12.045 g, 40.9 mmol, 114 % yield) as an orange oil: LC/MS (Purity QC) R, = 3.84, 3.89 min.; MS m/z: 294.40, 294.02 (M+H)+.
Preparation 5-(4-octylphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-ol
4-(4-octylphenyl)butane-l,2,4-triol (12 g, 40.6 mmol) was dissolved in 1,2-Dichloroethane (815 ml) under nitrogen. p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (1.55 g, 8.2 mmol) (TCI) was added and the reaction heated at about 50 0C for about 3 h. TLC in 1:1 EtO Ac/heptane showed (PMA visualization) reaction complete. The solution was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and extract with methylene chloride (2x). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to a yellow oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on 330 g redi-sep column eluting with 20% EtOAc in heptane for 10 min ramping to 50% over 20 min and then holding at 50% until all the product was off (monitor at 223 nm due to weak chromaphore at longer wavelengths). Removed solvent under reduced pressure to provide 5-(4- octylphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-ol (7.36 g, 26.6 mmol, 73.3 % yield) as a colorless oil: LC/MS (method A) R, = 3.76 min.; MS m/z: 277.15 (M+H)+.
Preparation of 5-(4-octylphenyl)dihydrofuran-3(2H)-one
5-(4-octylphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-ol (I g, 3.62 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (36.2 ml) in a sealed vial. PCC (3.12 g, 14.47 mmol) (Aldrich) was added and the reaction stirred for about 16 h. The methylene chloride was evaporated and the residue stirred with ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate was filtered through a pad of silica gel (approx. 50 mL silica) and product eluted with ethyl acetate. This removed most of the brown color. Concentrate and then chromatograph on a 40 g redi-sep column with 20-50% ethyl acetate in heptane. Remove solvent under reduced pressure to provide 5-(4-octylphenyl)dihydrofuran-3(2H)-one (0.839 g, 3.06 mmol, 85 % yield) as a colorless oil: LC/MS (method a) R, = 4.14 min.; MS m/z: 275.25 (M+H)+. 8-(4-octylphenyl)-7-oxa-lr?-diazaspiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione
5-(4-octylphenyl)dihydrofuran-3(2H)-one (0.8 g, 2.92 mmol) and ammonium carbonate (1.037 g, 13.12 mmol) (Aldrich) were combined in ethanol (12.05 ml) and water (12.05 ml). Potassium cyanide (0.209 g, 3.21 mmol) (Fluka) was added and the reaction heated at about 80 0C for about 16 h. Cool the reaction and add concentrated HCl until acidic (caution for HCN gas formation). The precipitate was collected by vacuum filtration and washed with water. It was suspended in methylene chloride, filtered, and washed with methylene chloride to provide 8-(4-octylphenyl)-7- oxa-l,3-diazaspiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione (0.545 g, 1.582 mmol, 54.3% yield) as a white solid: LC/MS (method A) R, = 4.29 min.; MS m/z: 343.46 (M-H)".
Preparation of 3-amino-5-(4-octyIphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-carboxyIic acid
8-(4-Octylphenyl)-7-oxa-l,3-diazaspiro[4.4]nonane-2,4-dione (0.5 g, 1.452 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (10.89 ml, 21.77 mmol) were combined in water (8.54 ml) and equipped with a reflux condensor. The mixture was heated at about 100 0C for about 72 h. The reaction was cooled and acidified with concentrated HCl until pH = 4-5. The product was collected by vacuum filtration and dried under vacuum. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (I" x 6" of silica) eluting with 1: 1 EtO Ac/(6:3: 1 CHCl3ZMeOHZNH4OH). The product fractions were combined. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure and the residue triturated with ether. The resulting solid was collected by vacuum filtration and washed with ether to provide 3-amino-5-(4- octylphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-carboxylic acid (0.280 g, 0.877 mmol, 60.4 % yield) as a white solid: LC/MS (method A) R, = 3.22 min.; MS m/z: 320.25 (M+H)+.
Preparation of (3-amino-5-(4-octylphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-yl)methanol
3-Amino-5-(4-octylphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-carboxylic acid (0.246 g, 0.770 mmol) was dissolved in THF ( 15.40 ml). A solution of lithium aluminum hydride (0.770 ml, 1.540 mmol) (Aldrich) was added carefully and the reaction stirred for about 3 h. The reaction was quenched by addition of water (60 uL) and stirred for about 30 min. 10% NaOH (180 uL) was added and the reaction stirred for about 1 h. Finally, water (60 uL) was added and the reaction stirred overnight. The mixuture was filtered through Celite® and the solvents removed under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (0.5" x 7" of silica) eluting with 10% MeOH in methylene chloride and the product fractions combined. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure to provide (3-amino-5-(4-octylphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-yl)methanol (0.1 g, 0.327 mmol, 42.5 % yield) as a colorless oil: LC/MS (method A) R, = 3.12 min.; MS m/z: 306.42 (M+H)+.
Preparation of (3-amino-5-methyl-5-(4-octylphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-yl)methanol
A solution of lithium aluminum hydride (2.70 ml, 5.40 mmol) (Aldrich) was added carefully to THF (17.99 ml) under nitrogen. 3-amino-5-methyl-5-(4-octylphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-carboxylic acid (0.6 g, 1.799 mmol) was added in small portions causing vigorous bubbling. The reaction stirred for about 2 h. TLC in 10% MeOH in methylene chloride showed (Hannessian's stain visualization) reaction complete. The reaction was quenched by addition of water (200 uL) and the reaction stirred about 30 min. 10% NaOH (0.6 mL) was added and the reaction stirred about 30 min. Finally, water (200 uL) was added and the reaction stirred about 30 min. The resulting solid was collected by vacuum filtration and washed with ether. The filtrate was concentrated to a colorless oil. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (40 g Redi-Sep) eluting with 10- 20% methanol in methylene chloride and the product fractions combined. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure. The residue was redissolve in methylene chloride and filtered through a syringe filter into a vial and washed through with methylene chloride. Solvent was removed under reduced pressure to provide (3-amino-5-methyl-5-(4-octylphenyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-yl)methanol (0.192 g, 0.601 mmol, 33.4 % yield) as a colorless oil that solidified on standing to a white solid: LCMS (method f) R, = 2.21 min.; MS m/z: 320.50 (M+H)+.
Scheme for preparation of phosphonates described below:
Preparation of tert-butyl (lRr3S)-l-(hydroxymethyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cycIopentylcarbamate
((lR,3S)-l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)methanol (4.72 g, 15.55 mmol) and pyridine (1.384 ml, 17.11 mmol) (Aldrich) were combined in THF (15.55 ml) under nitrogen to give a colorless solution. Di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (3.93 ml, 17.11 mmol) (Fluka) was added and the reaction stirred for about 4h and a precipitate formed. TLC in 1: 1 EtO Ac/heptane showed (KMnO4 visualization) reaction complete. Ethyl acetate (150 mL) and water (50 mL) were added and the layers separated and extracted with ethyl acetate (2 x 25 mL). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to an off-white solid. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (12O g Redi-Sep) eluting with ethyl acetate/heptane and the product fractions combined. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure to provide tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-(hydroxymethyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (4.086 g, 10.12 mmol, 65.1 % yield) as a white solid: LC/MS (method f) R, = 3.44 min.; MS mJz: 404.35 (M+H)+.
Preparation of tert-butyl (lRβS)-l-formyl-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate
Tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-(hydroxymethyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (3.9 g, 9.66 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (193 ml) under nitrogen to give a colorless solution. Dess-Martin periodinane (4.51 g, 10.63 mmol) (Aldrich) was added and the reaction stirred for about 3 h. LC/MS showed the reaction was complete. Methylene chloride (100 mL) and water (100 mL) were added and the layers separated and extracted with methylene chloride (2 x 50 mL). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to an off- white solid. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (120 g Redi-Sep) eluting with ethyl acetate/heptane and the product fractions combined. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure to provide tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-formyl-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (3.40 g, 88%) as an off white solid: LCVMS (method f) R, = 3.58 min.; MS m/z: 401.36 (MH-H)+.
Preparation of tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-((E)-2-(diethoxyphosphoryl)vinyl)-3-(4- octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate
Sodium hydride (0.020 g, 0.498 mmol) (Aldrich) was stirred in THF (3.32 ml) under nitrogen to give a colorless suspension. Tetraethyl methylenediphosphonate (0.124 ml, 0.498 mmol) (ALDRICH) was added and the reaction stirred for about 30 min. Tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-formyl-3- (4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.2 g, 0.498 mmol) was added in small portions and the reaction stirred for about 16 h. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure. Ethyl acetate (50 mL) and water (10 mL) were added and the layers separated and extracted with ethyl acetate (2 x 10 mL). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to a yellow oil. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (40 g Redi- Sep) eluting with ethyl acetate/heptane and the product fractions combined. The sovlent was removed under reduced pressure to provide tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-((E)-2-
(diethoxyphosphoryl)vinyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.237 g, 0.442 mmol, 89 % yield) as an orange oil: LC/MS (method f) R, = 3.12 min.; MS m/z: 553.42 (M+H20)+. Preparation of tert-butyl (lRr3S)-l-(2-(diethoxyphosphoryl)ethyl)-3-(4- octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate
Tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-((E)-2-(diethoxyphosphoryI)vinyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.237 g, 0.442 mmol) was dissolved in ethanol. Palladium on carbon (0.094 g, 0.088 mmol) was added and the reaction was flushed with hydrogen and hydrogenated at atmospheric pressure for about 72 h. The solution was filtered through a syringe filter and washed through with methanol. Solvent was removed under reduced pressure to provide tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-(2- (diethoxyphosphoryl)ethyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.236 g, 0.439 mmol, 99 % yield) as a colorless oil: LC/MS (method f) R, = 3.60 min.; MS m/z: 538.53 (M+H)+.
Preparation of 2-((lR,3S)-l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cydopentyI)ethylphosphonic acid
Tert-butyl ( lR,3S)-l-(2-(diethoxyphosphoryl)ethyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.236 g, 0.439 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (4.39 ml) under nitrogen to give a colorless solution. Bromotrimethylsilane (0.569 ml, 4.39 mmol) (Aldrich) was added and the reaction stirred for about 4h. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure. Methanol (4 mL) and water (0.2 mL) were added and the solution was stirred for about 16 h. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure to give a brown oil/solid. Water was added and the solution sonicated while scraping the sides of the vial. The solution was stirred with a stir bar for about 1 h. The resulting solid was collected by vacuum filtration and washed with water and then pentane to provide 2-((lR,3S)-l- amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)ethylphosphonic acid (0.150 g, 0.393 mmol, 90% yield) as a off-white solid on drying under vacuum at 60 0C: LC/MS (method a) R, = 3.15 min.; MS m/z: 382.27 (M+H)+.
Preparation of (E)-2-((lR,3S)-l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)vinylphosphonic acid
Tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-((E)-2-(diethoxyphosphoryl)vinyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.2 g, 0.373 mmol) (10035787-0263) was dissolved in dichloromethane (3.73 ml) in a sealed vial to give a colorless solution. Bromotrimethylsilane (0.484 ml, 3.73 mmol) (Fluka) was added and the reaction stirred for about 16 h. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure to a thick oil. Methanol (4 mL) and water (0.2 mL) were added. The solution was sonicated and stirred, resulting in a cloudy reaction where a heavy precipitate forms. The solutionw as stirred for about 4 h. Add water (5 mL) and more product precipitated. The resulting solid was collected by vacuum filtration,washed with water and then pentane and dried under vacuum to provide (E)-2-((lR,3S)-l- amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)vinylphosphonic acid (0.117 g, 0.308 mmol, 83 % yield) as a white solid: LCMS (method a) R, = 3.01 min.; MS m/z: 380.21 (M+H)+.
Preparation of diethyl 2-((lR,3S)-l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)ethylphosphonate
Tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-(2-(diethoxyphosphoryl)ethyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.2 g, 0.372 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (1.860 ml) in a sealed vial to give a colorless solution. TFA (1.860 ml) was added and the reaction stirred for about 1 h. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure. Methylene chloride (25 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate (25 mL) were added and the layers separated and extracted with methylene chloride (2 x 10 mL). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to a yellow oil. The oil was dissolve in ether (15 mL). 1 M HCl in dioxane (3 mL) was added. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure. The solid was redissolved in water and lyophilized. The resulting white/tan solid was suspended in ether and the resulting solid was collected by vacuum filtration and washed with ether then heptane to provide diethyl 2-((lR,3S)-l-amino-3-(4- octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)ethylphosphonate (0.0787 g, 0.180 mmol, 48.4 % yield) as a white solid on drying under vacuum: LCMS (method a) R, = 3.46 min.; MS m/z: 438.48 (M+H)+.
Preparation of tert-butyl 2-(4-(4-bromophenyl)-lH-l,2,3-triazol-l-yl)acetate
A 5 mL microwave reaction vial equipped with a pressure releasing septa cap was charged with tert- butyl 2-bromoacetate (0.408 ml, 2.76 mmol) and sodium azide (0.215 g, 3.31 mmol) in Water (0.552 ml) and DMSO (4.97 ml) at it. The resulting suspension was heated at 65 0C for 15 h. The reaction was allowed to cool to it and ice was added in one portion. The resulting solid was removed by filtration to give tert-butyl 2-(4-(4-bromophenyl)-lH-l,2,3-triazol-l-yl)acetate (0.868g, 2.57 mmol, 93% yield): LCMS (method c) R, = 2.35 min.; MS m/z: 338,340 (M+H)+.
Preparation of tert-butyl 2-(4-(4-(oct-l-ynyl)phenyl)-lH-l,2,3-triazoI-l-yl)acetate
A 25 mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a reflux condenser outfitted with anitrogen inlet adapter was charged with tert-butyl 2-(4-(4-bromophenyl)-lH-l,2,3-triazol-l-yl)acetate (0.200 mg, 0.591 mmol), bis-acetonitrilepalladium(II) chloride (0.003 g, 0.012 mmol), dicyclohexyl(2',4\6'- triisopropylbiphenyl-2-yl)phosphine (0.017 g, 0.035 mmol), and cesium carbonate (0.674 g, 2.07 mmol). The flask was evacuated and filled with nitrogen and then acetonitrile (12 mL) and 1- octyne (0.228 g, 2.07 mmol) were each added dropwise via syringe. The resulting mixture was heated at 100 °C for 72 h. The reaction was allowed to cool to rt and filtered through a pad of celite. The filtrate was concentrated and purified by silica gel chromatography (elution with ethyl acetate in heptane) to provide tert-butyl 2-(4-(4-(oct-l-ynyl)phenyl)-lH-l,2,3-triazol-l-yl)acetate (0.115 g, 0.304 mmol, 51% yield) as a solid: LCMS (method a) R, = 3.89 min.; MS m/z: 368 (M+H)+.
Preparation of tert-butyl 2-(4-(4-octylphenyI)-lH-l,2,3-triazol-l-yl)acetate
A 50 mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a rubber septum outfitted with a hydrogen-filled balloon was charged with tert-butyl 2-(4-(4-(oct-l-ynyl)phenyl)-lH-l,2,3-triazol-l-yl)acetate (0.083 g, 0.226 mmol), Pd(OH)2 (3.17 mg, 0.023 mmol), and ammonium carbonate (0.217 g, 2.259 mmol) in ethanol (4.5 ml) at rt. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir at it for 6 h. The resulting mixture was filtered through a pad of celite with the aid of EtOAc. The filtrate was concentrated to afford tert-butyl 2-(4-(4-octyIphenyl)-lH-l,2,3-triazol-l-yl)acetate (0.070 g, 0.175 mmol, 78% yield) as a solid: LCMS (method a) R, = 4.20 min.; MS m/Z: 372 (M+H)+.
Preparation of 2-(4-(4-octyIphenyl)-lH-l^^-triazol-l-yl)acetic acid
A 50 mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a nitrogen inlet adapter was charged with tert-butyl 2- (4-(4-octylphenyl)-lH-l,2,3-triazol-l-yl)acetate (0.042 g, 0.113 mmol) and TFA (0.044 ml, 0.565 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (2.261 ml) at rt. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir at it for 20 h. An additional portion of TFA (0.50 ml, 6.49 mmol) was added and the resulting mixture was allowed to stir at rt for an additional 24h. The mixture was concentrated to provide a solid that was purified by reverse-phase HPLC (elution with MeCN in water) to give 2-(4-(4-octylphenyl)-lH-l,2,3-triazol-l- yl)acetic acid (0.025 g, 0.079 mmol, 70% yield) as a solid: LCMS (method a) R, = 3.41 min.; MS m/z: 316 (M+H)+.
Preparation of (5R,7R)-7-(3-iodo-4-methoxyphenyl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one
A 50 mL round-bottomed flask equipped with rubber septum and nitrogen inlet needle was charged with (5R,7R)-7-(4-methoxyphenyl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (0.504 g, 2.038 mmol) in Acetonitrile (10.2 mL) to give a colorless solution. The flask was protected from light with foil. ICl (0.255 ml, 5.10 mmol) was added dropwise via syringe. The resulting solution was allowed to stir at rt for 2 h. Sat'd Na2S2C^ solution was added in one portion and the mixture was allowed to stir at rt overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc. The organic phase was separated and washed with sat NaHCOj and sat NaCl. The organic phase was dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated to give (5R,7R)-7-(3-iodo-4-methoxyphenyl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (0.760 g, 2.04 mmol, 100% yield) as a solid: LCMS (method a) R, = 3.21 min.; MS m/z: 374 (M+H)+.
Preparation of (5R,7R)-7-(4-hydroxy-3-iodophenyl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one
A 25 mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a rubber septum and nitrogen inlet needle was charged with (5R,7R)-7-(3-iodo-4-methoxyphenyl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (0.209 g, 0.560 mmol) in dichloromethane (5.6 ml) to give a colorless solution. BBr3 solution in DCM (1.57 ml, 1.57 mmol) was added dropwise via syringe at 0 0C. The resulting solution was allowed to stir at 0 0C for 1 h. The sample was treated with MeOH at 0 0C and concentrated. The residue was treated with three additional 20-mL portions of MeOH and concentrated after each addition to afford (5R,7R)-7-(4-hydroxy-3-iodophenyl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (0.198 g, 0.551 mmol, 98% yield) as an oily-solid: LCMS (method c) R, = 1.77 min.; MS m/z: 358 (M-H)".
Preparation of (5R,7R)-7-(2-phenylbenzofuran-5-yI)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one
A 100 mL round-bottomed flask equipped with rubber septum and nitrogen inlet needle was charged with (5R,7R)-7-(4-hydroxy-3-iodophenyl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (0.198 g, 0.551 mmol), bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride (0.039 g, 0.055 mmol), and copper(I) iodide (0.010 g, 0.055 mmol), evacuated and filled with nitrogen, and then Et3N (3.84 mL) was added to give a suspension. Ethynylbenzene (0.073 ml, 0.662 mmol) was added dropwise via syringe and the resulting suspension was allowed to stir at rt for 6 h. The suspension was filtered through a pad of celite and concentrated. The residue was triturated with water and washed with three 30-mL portions of water. The resulting solid was air-dried to give a solid that was purified via silica gel chromatography (gradient elution with 50%-100% ethyl acetate in heptane) to afford (5R,7R)-7-(2-phenylbenzofuran-5-yl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (0.055 g, 0.165 mmol, 30% yield) as a solid: LCMS (method a) R, = 3.86 min.; MS m/z: 351 (M+NH,)*-
Preparation of ((lR3R)-l-amino-3-(2-phenylbenzofuran-5-yl)cyclopentyl)methanol
A 100 mL round-bottomed flask equipped with reflux condensor outfitted with a nitrogen inlet adapter was charged with (5R,7R)-7-(2-phenylbenzofuran-5-yl)-3-oxa-l-azaspiro[4.4]nonan-2-one (0.055 g, 0.165 mmol) in dioxane (2.6 ml). Lithium hydroxide (0.079 g, 3.30 mmol) was added in one portion as a solution in water (0.660 ml). The reaction mixture was heated at 100 0C for 16 h and then approximately ImL of 4N HCl solution in dioxane was added. The solution was concentrated and the resulting solid was triturated with 2 mL of water and 2 mL of EtOAc. The material was filtered through a sintered glass funnel, washed with EtOAc, and dried open to the air to give a powder that was suspended in acetic acid and agitated for 5 min. The resulting suspension was filtered through a sintered glass funnel and the filtrate was concentrated to afford ((1R,3R)-1- amino-3-(2-phenylbenzofuran-5-yl)cyclopentyl)methanol (0.003 g, 0.009 mmol, 5% yield) as a solid: LCMS (method a) R, = 2.73 min.; MS m/z: 308 (M+H)+.
Preparation of diethyl (ethoxy(methyl)phosphoryl)methylphosphonate
Reference: J. Organomet. Chem. 2002, 662, 83-97.
THF (30.0 ml) was cooled to about -78 0C in a dry ice/acetone bath under nitrogen. A solution of sec-butyllithium (9.39 ml, 13.15 mmol) was added in one portion. A solution of diethyl methylphosphonate (1.923 ml, 13.15 mmol) dissolved in THF (15 mL) was added dropwise and the reaction stirred for about 1 h. A solution of methylphosphonic dichloride (0.534 ml, 5.90 mmol) dissolved in THF (15 mL) was added and the reaction stirred for about 2 h. Ethanol (0.345 ml, 5.90 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for about 16 h. Methylene chloride (50 mL) and water (30 mL) were added and the layers separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with methylene chloride (2 x 20 mL). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to a colorless oil. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (80 g Redi-Sep) eluting with EtOAc. The solvent was switched to 10% methanol/methylene chloride and the product eluted. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure to provide diethyl (ethoxy(rnethyl)phosphoryl)methylphosphonate (0.676 g, 2.62 mmol, 19.92% yield) as a colorless oil: 1H NfMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ (ppm) 4.25-4.05 (m, 6H), 2.41 (dd, 2H), 1.70 (d, 3 H), 1.35 (t, 9H). Preparation of (lRr3S)-l-((E)-2-(ethoxy(methyl)phosphoryl)vinyl)-3-(4- octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate
Reference: TeL Lett. 1993, 34, 1585-1588.
Magnesium bromide diethyl etherate (0.120 g, 0.465 mmol) and diethyl
(ethoxy(methyθphosphoryl)methylphosphonate (0.1 g, 0.387 mmol) were combined in THF (1.174 ml) in a sealed vial to give a white suspension. The mixture was stiired for about 15 min. Triethylamine (0.060 ml, 0.434 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for about 30 min. Tert- butyl (lR,3S)-l-formyl-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.184 g, 0.457 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for about 72 h. The reaction was quenched by addition of 0.1 N HCI (2 mL). Methylene chloride (15 mL) was added and the layers separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with methylene chloride (2 x 10 mL). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to a colorless oil. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography (12 g Redi-Sep) eluting with EtOAc and the product fractions combined. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure to provide tert-butyl (1R,3S)-1-((E)- 2-(ethoxy(methyl)phosphoryl)vinyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.037 g, 0.073 mmol, 18.89 % yield) as a colorless oil: LCMS (method f) R1 = 2.92 min.; MS m/z: 506.42 (M+H)+, 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ (ppm) 7.12 (m, 4H), 6.86 (t, IH), 5.77 (t,lH), 4.80 (s, IH), 4.10-3.90 (m, 2H), 3.22 (m, IH), 2.58 (t, 2H), 2.52-2.42 (m, IH), 1.60 (m, 3H), 1.53 (d, 3H), 1.43 (s, 9H), 1.36-1.24 (m, 14H), 0.89 (t, 3H).
Preparation of (lR,3S)-l-(2-(ethoxy(methyl)phosphoryl)ethyI)-3-(4- octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate
Tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-((E)-2-(ethoxy(methyl)phosphoryl)vinyl)-3-(4- octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.037 g, 0.073 mmol) was dissolved in ethanol (1.463 ml). Palladium on carbon (7.79 mg, 7.32 μmol) was added, the reaction was flushed with hydrogen, and hydrogenated at atmospheric pressure for about 16 h. The mixture was filtered through a syringe filter and wash through with methanol. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure to provide tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-(2-(ethoxy(methyl)phosphoryl)ethyl)-3-(4- octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.047 g, 0.093 mmol, 127 % yield) as a colorless oil: LCMS (method f) R, = 2.62 min.; MS m/z: 508.38 (M+H)+, 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ (ppm) 7.12 (dd, 4H), 4.60 (s, IH), 4.09 (m, 2H), 3.12 (m, IH), 2.57 (t, 2H), 2.30 (m, IH), 2.20-1.55 (m, 13H), 1.48 (d, 3H), 1.45 (s, 9H), 1.35-1.26 (m, 14H), 0.89 (t, 3H).
Preparation of 2-((lR,3S)-l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cycIopentyl)ethyl(methyl)phosphinic acid, Acetic Acid
Reference: J. Med. Chem. 1995, 38, 3313-3331.
Tert-butyl (lR,3S)-l-(2-(ethoxy(methyl)phosphoryl)ethyl)-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentylcarbamate (0.047 g, 0.093 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (0.926 ml) in a sealed vial to give a colorless solution. Bromotrimethylsilane (0.060 ml, 0.463 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for about 16 h. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure. Water (1 mL) and methanol (5 mL) were added and the reaction stirred for about 4 h. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure. Water (5 mL) was added and the pH adjusted with ammonium hydroxide to about pH = 5. The mixture formed a clear gel. The mixture was frozen and lyophilized. Add water to dissolve product. Semi-prep HPLC in 1 mM ammonium acetate buffer. Product fractions were lyophilized to a sticky white solid that was dried under vacuum at 60 0C. Redissolve in methanol and transfer to vial. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure and dried under vacuum at 35 0C to give 2-((lR,3S)-l-amino-3-(4-octylphenyl)cyclopentyl)ethyl(methyl)phosphinic acid, acetic acid salt (0.029 g, 0.066 mmol, 71.3 % yield) as a colorless glassy solid: LCMS (method g) R, = 1.80 min.; MS m/z: 508.38 (M+H) +, 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) 6 (ppm) 7.15 (dd, 4H), 3.03 (m, IH), 2.54 (t, 2H), 2.38-2.02 (m, 8H), 1.88-1.78 (m, 3H), 1.60-1.53 (m, 2H), 1.38-1.22 (m, 14H), 0.89 (t, 3H).
Preparation of ethyl l-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-(4- octylphenoxy)cyclopentanecarboxylate
4-octylphenol (1.019 g, 4.94 mmol), ethyl l-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3- hydroxycyclopentanecarboxylate (0.9 g, 3.29 mmol) (Pharmacore) , and triphenylphosphine (2.74 g, 8.23 mmol) (Argonaut) were combined in THF (32.9 ml) under nitrogen. Molecular sieves 4A (3.29 mmol) were added and the reaction stirred about 30 m in. Di-tert-butyl azodicarboxylate (1.137 g, 4.94 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for about 18 h. The reaction was filtered through celite and washed through with methylene chloride. The solvents were removed under reduced pressure to provide an oil. The residue was chromatographed on a 40 g redi sep column with gradient EtO Ac/heptane (10-50%). Remove solvent under reduced pressure to provide ethyl 1- (tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-(4-octylphenoxy)cyclopentanecarboxylate (1.175 g, 2.55 mmol, 77 % yield) as a colorless oil: LCMS (method f) R, = 3.58 min.; MS m/z: 462.44 (M+H)+, 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ (ppm) 7.13 (m, 2H), 6.77 (m, 2H), 5.20-4.82 (2 broad s, cis/trans isomers, 1 H), 4.20 (q, IH), 2.72-1.98 (m, 3H), 2.52 (t, 2H), 1.58 (m, 2H), 1.45 (m, 5H), 1.33-1.20 (m, 12H), 0.89 (t, 3H).
Preparation of ethyl l-amino-3-(4-octylphenoxy)cyclopentanecarboxylate
Ethyl l-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-(4-octylphenoxy)cyclopentanecarboxylate (1.1 g, 2.383 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (11.91 ml) under nitrogen. Trifluoroacetic acid (11.91 ml, 155 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for about 2 h. Solvents were removed under reduced pressure. Add 1 N NaOH and extract with ethyl acetate (2x). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated to a colorless oil. Chromatograph on a 40 g redi-sep column in 20-50% EtOAc in heptane. Remove solvent under reduced pressure to provide ethyl l-amino-3-(4-octylphenoxy)cyclopentanecarboxyIate (0.554 g, 1.532 mmol, 64.3 % yield) as a colorless oil: LCMS (method 0 R; = 2.91, 3.15 min.; MS m/z: 363.56, 363.49 (M+H)+, 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ (ppm) 7.10 (m, 2H), 6.82 (m, 2H), 5.00-4.85 (2 m, cis/trans isomers, IH), 4.26-4.18 (m, 2H), 2.65-2.54 (m, 3H), 2.45-1.92 (m, 7H), 1.72-1.56 (m,2H), 1.37-1.24 (m, 14H), 0.91 (t, 3H). Preparation of (l-amino-3-(4-octylphenoxy)cyclopentyl)methanoI (A-1007664.0)
LiAIH.
Ethyl l-amino-3-(4-octylphenoxy)cyclopentanecarboxylate (0.554 g, 1.532 mmol) was dissolved in THF (15.32 ml) open to the air. A solution of lithium aluminum hydride (1.532 ml, 3.06 mmol) was added carefully and the reaction stirred for about 2 h. The reaction was quenched with water (0.116 mL) and stirred for about 30 min. 1 N NaOH (0.350 mL) was added and the reaction stirred for about 30 min. An additional amount of water (0.116 mL) was added and the reaction stirred for more than 30 min. The resulting precipitate was removed by syringe filter. The solution was concentrated on the rotovap and then chromatographed over silica gel in 4:1 EtOAc/(6:3: l CHCl3ZMeOHZNH4OH). Remove solvent under reduced pressure to provide (l-amino-3-(4- octylphenoxy)cyclopentyl)methanol (0.335 g, 1.049 mmol, 68.4 % yield) as a colorless oil: LCMS (method a) R, = 3.12 min.; MS mZz: 321.17 (M+H)+, 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ (ppm) 7.06 (m, 2H), 6.76 (m, 2H), 4.90-4.75 (2 m, cis/trans isomers, IH), 3.56-3.36 (2 m, cisZtrans isomers, 2H), 2.52 (t, 2H), 2.25-1.66 (m, 9H), 1.61-1.50 (m, 2H), 1.35-1.22 (m, HH), 0.89 (t, 3H).
Preparation of (l-amino-3-(4-octylphenoxy)cyclopentyl)methyl dihydrogen phosphate
(l-Amino-3-(4-octylphenoxy)cyclopentyl)methanol (0.052 g, 0.163 mmol) was dissolved in THF (3.26 ml) in a sealed vial. A solution of lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (0.163 ml, 0.163 mmol) was added carefully and the reaction stirred for about 15 min. Tetrabenzyl diphosphate (0.088 g, 0.163 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for about 20 h. The heavy white precipitate was removed by vacuum filtration and washed with THF. The filtrate was concentrated and dissolved in acetic acid. Palladium on carbon (0.017 g, 0.016 mmol) was added and the reaction flushed with hydrogen. Hydrogenate at atmospheric pressure overnight. Filter and concentrate to remove acetic acid. Add water and sonicate. The resulting solid was collected by vacuum filtration and washed with water to provide (l-amino-3-(4-octylphenoxy)cyclopentyl)methyl dihydrogen phosphate (0.032 g, 0.080 mmol, 49.2 % yield) as a tan solid on drying under vacuum at 60 0C: LCMS (method a) R, = 3.10 min.; MS mZz: 400.24 (M+H)+, 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ (ppm) 7.2 (d, 2H), 6.83 (d, 2H), 4.98-4.75 (2 m, cisZtrans isomers, IH), 3.85 (m, 1 H), 2.40-1.6 (m, 5H), 1.55 (m, 2H), 1.24 (m, 12H), 0.91 (t, 3H).

Claims

What is claimed:
1. A compound of Formula I
Formula I
wherein
D is H, N(R5)2 or OR6;
X is CH, C(CH3) or N;
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkyl;
A is H, hydroxy, -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(OH)(CH3)2, -0(CH2)t-C00H,-, -C(O)-NR6, optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-0- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(R7), -CH=CH-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), C(O)-NHCH3, CN, COOR6 or -R4-COOH, wherein R4 is straight or branched (C1-C20) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkenylene, straight or branched (CrC20) alkynylene, (C3- C20)cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted azetidinyl;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF3, halo, (Cr C20) alkyl, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2- C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted (Ci-C20)alkyl, heteroaryl substituted (C2-C20)alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-C20) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (CrC20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C20) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R1 and R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R5 is independently H, optionally substituted (CrC3)alkyl, or -C(O)-O-(Ci -C3)alkyl- optionally substituted phenyl; each R6 is independently H or optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl; each R7 is independently H, optionally substituted (d-C2)alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl; m is 1 or 2; n is 1, 2 or 3; t is 1, 2 or 3; and u is 0, 1 or 2; provided that A and D are not both Hat the same time.; and provided the compound is not
wherein X is CH or N;
Y is CH2, NH, N(CH3), S or O.
2. The compound of claim 1 wherein
A is H, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(O)-NR6, CN, C(O)-NHCH3, COOR6, -R4-C00H, or optionally substituted azetidinyl, wherein R4 is straight or branched (Ci-C2o) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkenylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkynylene;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (Ci-Cio) alkyl, (Ci-Ci0) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-Ci0) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-Ci0) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-Ci0) alkenyl, (C2-C10) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2-C10) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted (C1-Ci0) alkyl, heteroaryl substituted (Q-C10) alkyl, aryl substituted (Ci-Ci0) alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted (Ci-C10) alkoxy, (Ci-C10) alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl and aryl substituted arylalkyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with (C1-Ci0) alkyl, halo, hydroxy, (Ci-Ci0) alkoxy, or CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-Ci0) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R1 and R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo.
3. The compound according to claim 2 wherein the compound is a formula of Formula Ia:
Formula Ia
and isomers, stereoisomers, esters, prodrugs, and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof, wherein;
X is CH;
Y is CH2 or O;
A is -C(O)-OCH3, -COOH, -R4-COOH, -C(O)-NHCH3, or optionally substituted azetidinyl; wherein R4 is straight or branched (Ci-Cj0) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-Qo) alkenylene, or straight or branched (CrCi0) alkynylene;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, (Ci-Ci0) alkoxy, (C3-Ci0) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-Ci0) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-Ci0) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-Ci0) alkenyl, (C2-Ci0) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2-Ci0) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted (CrCi0)alkyl, heteroaryl substituted (CrCi0)alkyl, aryl substituted heteroaryl substituted (Ci-Cio)alkoxy, (CrCi0)alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl and aryl substituted arylalkyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with (CrCio) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (Ci-Ci0) alkoxy, or CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-Ci0) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; and n is 1 or 2.
4. The compound according to claim 3 wherein Y is CH2;
A is -CH2-COOH, COOH or
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, (C2-Ci0) alkenyl, (C2-C,o) alkynyl and aryl substituted (C,-C10) alkyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with (CrCi0) alkyl, halo, hydroxy, (Ci-Ci0) alkoxy, or cyano; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen.
5. The compound according to Claim 4 wherein
X is CH; Y is CH2; A is COOH;
R1 is (Ci-Cio)alkyl, (C2-Ci0)alkenyl or (C2-C10)alkynyl; R2 is H; and m is 1.
6. The compound according to Claim 5 wherein the compound is
7. The compound according to Claim 1 wherein
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or (C1-C10) alkyl;
A is H, -CH2OH, -CH2OH5-C(O)-OCH3, -optionally substituted -(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-O-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), -CH=CH-O- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7) or CN ,
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, straight or branched (C1-Ci0) alkyl, (C1-C10) alkoxy, (C3-C10) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-Ci0) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-Ci0) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-Ci0) alkenyl, (C2-Ci0) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2-C10) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted (CrCi0)alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, (CrCi0)alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, cyano and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, halo, hydroxy, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 gτoups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-Ci0) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo;
R6 is independently selected from H or optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl;
R7 is independently selected from H or optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl; and u is 1 or 2.
8. The compound according to Claim 1 wherein the compound is a compound of Formula Ib:
Formula Ib
wherein;
X is CH or N;
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or (Ci-C20) alkyl;
A is -CH2-OH, optionally substituted -CH2-P(=(O)(OR7)(OR7) or optionally substituted -
CH2-O-P(=(O)(OR7)(OR7);
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, (Ci-C20) alkyl, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl and aryl substituted arylalkyl; wherein such R2 groups may be optionally substituted with (Ci-C2o) alkyl, halo, hydroxy, (C1-C20) alkoxy, or cyano; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (C1-C20) alkyl group; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo.
9. The compound of claim 7 wherein
X is CH;
Y is CH2;
A is -CH2OH, optionally substituted -(CH2)n-O-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7) or optionally substituted -(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7) ,
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, straight or branched (C1-Ci0) alkyl, aryl substituted (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, (Ci-Cio)alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-Ci0) alkyl, halo and (CrCi0) alkoxy; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R6 is independently selected from H or optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl; and u is 1 or 2.
10. The compound of claim 9 wherein
A is -CH2OH or optionally substituted -(CH2)n-O-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7).
D is NH2;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted (CrCi0) alkyl; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen;; m is 1; and u is 1.
11. The compound of claim 10 wherein the compound is
12. A compound of the formula
13. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I
Formula I wherein
D is H, N(R5)2 , or OR6;
X is CH, C(CH3) or N;
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkyl;
A is H, hydroxy, -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(OH)(CH3)2, -O(CH2)rCOOH,-, -C(O)-NR6, optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-0- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(R7), -CH=CH-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), C(O)-NHCH3, CN, COOR6 or -R4-C00H, wherein R4 is straight or branched (C1-C20) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkenylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkynylene, (C3- C20)cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted azetidinyl;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF3, halo, (Cr C20) alkyl, (CrC20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2- C2o) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-C2o) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (C1-C20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C2o) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R5 is independently H, optionally substituted (CrC3)alkyl, or -C(O)-O-(CrC3)alkyl- optionally substituted phenyl; each R6 is independently H or optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl; each R7 is independently H, optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl; m is 1 or 2; n is 1, 2 or 3; t is 1, 2 or 3; and u is 0, 1 or 2;or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier.
14. A method of treating a disorder comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of Formula I
Formula I wherein
D is H, N(R5)2 , or OR6;
X is CH, C(CH3) or N;
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkyl;
A is H, hydroxy, -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(OH)(CH3)2, -0(CH2),-C00H,-, -C(O)-NR6, optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-0- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(R7), -CH=CH-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), C(O)-NHCH3, CN, COOR6 or -R4-COOH, wherein R4 is straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkylene, straight or branched (CrC2o) alkenylene, straight or branched (Ci-C2o) alkynylene, (C3- QoXycloalkyl, or optionally substituted azetidinyl;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF3, halo, (Q- C20) alkyl, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2- C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-C20) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (C1-C20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C20) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R5 is independently H, optionally substituted (CrC3)alkyl, or -C(O)-O-(C i-C3)alkyl- optionally substituted phenyl; each R6 is independently H or optionally substituted (CrC2)alkyl; each R7 is independently H, optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl; m is 1 or 2; n is 1, 2 or 3; t is 1, 2 or 3; and u is O, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof.
15. The method of claim 14 wherein the disorder is rheumatoid arthritis, lupus, Crohn's disease, asthma, diabetes, pain or psoriasis.
16. A method of treating a central nervous system disorder comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of Formula I wherein
D is H, N(R5)2 , or OR6;
X is CH, C(CH3) or N;
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (CrCi0) alkyl; A is H, hydroxy, -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(OH)(CH3)2, -0(CH2)t-C00H,-, -C(O)-NR6, optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-0- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(R7), -CH=CH-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), C(O)-NHCH3, CN, COOR6 or -R4-C00H, wherein R4 is straight or branched (C1-C20) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkenylene, straight or branched (CrC20) alkynylene, (C3- C^cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted azetidinyl;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF3, halo, (Q- C20) alkyl, (C,-C20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2- C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-C20) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (CrC20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C20) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R5 is independently H, optionally substituted (CrC3)alkyl, or -C(O)-O-(C ,-C3)alkyl- optionally substituted phenyl; each R6 is independently H or optionally substituted (CrC2)alkyI; each R7 is independently H, optionally substituted (Ci-C2)alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl; m is 1 or 2; n is 1, 2 or 3; t is 1, 2 or 3; and u is O, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof.
17. A method of treating multiple sclerosis comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of claim 1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof.
18. A packaged pharmaceutical comprising one or more compounds according to Formula I wherein
Formula I
D iS H1 5 Or /O-ΛRΓ> 66.;
X is CH, C(CH3) or N;
Y is CH2, O, S or NR3; wherein R3 is hydrogen, or straight or branched (Ci-Ci0) alkyl;
A is H, hydroxy, -CH2OH, -CH(OH)CH3, -C(O)-OCH3, -C(OH)(CH3)2, -O(CH2),-COOH,-, -C(O)-NR6, optionally substituted-(CH2)n-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted -(CH2)n-O- P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), optionally substituted-(CH2)π-P(=O)(OR7)(R7), -CH=CH-P(=O)(OR7)(OR7), C(O)-NHCH3, CN, COOR6 or -R4-COOH, wherein R4 is straight or branched (C1-C20) alkylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkenylene, straight or branched (Ci-C20) alkynylene, (C3- C20)cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted azetidinyl;
R1 and R2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, CF3, halo, (Q - C20) alkyl, (CrC20) alkoxy, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkyl, (C3-C20) cycloalkyl substituted alkoxy, (C2-C20) alkenyl, aryl substituted (C2-C20) alkenyl, (C2-C20) alkynyl, aryl substituted (C2- C20) alkynyl, aryl, aryl substituted alkyl, heteroaryl substituted alkyl, aryl substituted alkoxy, heteroaryl substituted alkoxy, alkyl substituted aryl, arylalkyl, aryl substituted arylalkyl, arylalkyl substituted arylalkyl, CN and -O-indolizinyl; wherein such R1 and R2 groups may be optionally substituted with one or more substitutents independently selected from (Ci-C20) alkyl, CF3, halo, hydroxy, (Ci-C20) alkoxy, OCF3, and CN; wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the R1 or R2 groups can be independently replaced with non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur or NR8; wherein R8 is hydrogen or (Ci-C20) alkyl group; wherein one of R1 and R2 is other than hydrogen; and wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups in R2 are optionally substituted with oxo or halo; each R5 is independently H, optionally substituted (CrC3)alkyl, or -C(O)-O-(C, -C3)alkyl- optionally substituted phenyl; each R6 is independently H or optionally substituted (Q-C2)alkyl; each R7 is independently H, optionally substituted (Q-C2)alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl; m is 1 or 2; n is 1, 2 or 3; t is 1, 2 or 3; and u is 0, 1 or 2; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, metabolite, prodrug, enantiomer or stereoisomer thereof and instructions for use.
19. The packaged pharmaceutical according to claim 18 wherein the compound or compounds are present in a therapeutically effective amount.
20. A compound of Formula 2, Formula 3 or Formula 4
Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4
21. A compound of Formula 5, Formula 6, Formula 7, Formula 8, Formula 9 or Formula 10
Formula 5 Formula 6 Formula 7
Formula 8 Formula 9 Formula 10
22. A compound of Formula 11 or Formula 12
Formula 12
Formula 11
EP07863237A 2006-12-21 2007-12-21 Sphingosine-1 -phosphate receptor agonist and antagonist compounds Withdrawn EP2120575A4 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US87631806P 2006-12-21 2006-12-21
US87628806P 2006-12-21 2006-12-21
PCT/US2007/026263 WO2008079382A1 (en) 2006-12-21 2007-12-21 Sphingosine-1 -phosphate receptor agonist and antagonist compounds

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP2120575A1 true EP2120575A1 (en) 2009-11-25
EP2120575A4 EP2120575A4 (en) 2011-04-27

Family

ID=39562856

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP07863237A Withdrawn EP2120575A4 (en) 2006-12-21 2007-12-21 Sphingosine-1 -phosphate receptor agonist and antagonist compounds

Country Status (19)

Country Link
EP (1) EP2120575A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2010513532A (en)
KR (1) KR20090095659A (en)
AR (1) AR064650A1 (en)
AU (1) AU2007338700A1 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0720478A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2672727A1 (en)
CL (1) CL2007003784A1 (en)
CO (1) CO6180436A2 (en)
CR (1) CR10872A (en)
DO (1) DOP2009000149A (en)
EC (1) ECSP099435A (en)
MX (1) MX2009006751A (en)
NO (1) NO20092376L (en)
PE (1) PE20081561A1 (en)
RU (1) RU2009128062A (en)
TW (1) TW200838497A (en)
UY (1) UY30829A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2008079382A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (40)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
MX2008009579A (en) * 2006-01-27 2008-09-25 Univ Virginia Method for treatment of neuropathic pain.
JP2009526073A (en) 2006-02-09 2009-07-16 ユニバーシティ オブ バージニア パテント ファンデーション Bicyclic sphingosine-1-phosphate receptor analogs
AU2007323540A1 (en) 2006-11-21 2008-05-29 University Of Virginia Patent Foundation Hydrindane analogs having sphingosine 1-phosphate receptor agonist activity
AU2007323557A1 (en) 2006-11-21 2008-05-29 University Of Virginia Patent Foundation Benzocycloheptyl analogs having sphingosine 1-phosphate receptor activity
MX2009006748A (en) * 2006-12-21 2009-06-30 Abbott Lab Process for the preparation and isolation of the individual stereoisomers of 1-amino, 3-substituted phenylcyclopentane carboxylates.
JP5420534B2 (en) * 2007-05-31 2014-02-19 サノビオン ファーマシューティカルズ インク Phenyl-substituted cycloalkylamines as monoamine reuptake inhibitors
MX354134B (en) 2008-07-23 2018-02-14 Arena Pharm Inc SUBSTITUTED 1,2,3,4- TETRAHYDROCYCLOPENTA[b]INDOL-3-YL) ACETIC ACID DERIVATIVES USEFUL IN THE TREATMENT OF AUTOIMMUNE AND INFLAMMATORY DISORDERS.
US8415484B2 (en) 2008-08-27 2013-04-09 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted tricyclic acid derivatives as S1P1 receptor agonists useful in the treatment of autoimmune and inflammatory disorders
WO2010043000A1 (en) 2008-10-17 2010-04-22 Akaal Pharma Pty Ltd S1p receptors modulators and their use thereof
WO2010042998A1 (en) 2008-10-17 2010-04-22 Akaal Pharma Pty Ltd S1p receptors modulators
AR074062A1 (en) * 2008-10-31 2010-12-22 Lexicon Pharmaceuticals Inc S1P RECEIVER AGONISTS FOR THE TREATMENT OF BRAIN MALARIA AND PHARMACEUTICAL FORM
AR074061A1 (en) * 2008-10-31 2010-12-22 Lexicon Pharmaceuticals Inc S1P LIASA INHIBITORS FOR THE TREATMENT OF CEREBRAL MALARIA AND PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATION
JP2012515787A (en) 2009-01-23 2012-07-12 ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー Substituted oxadiazole derivatives as S1P agonists in the treatment of autoimmune and inflammatory diseases
US8389509B2 (en) 2009-01-23 2013-03-05 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Substituted pyrazole compounds
US8404672B2 (en) 2009-01-23 2013-03-26 Bristol-Meyers Squibb Company Substituted heterocyclic compounds
US8399451B2 (en) 2009-08-07 2013-03-19 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Heterocyclic compounds
EP2528894A1 (en) 2010-01-27 2012-12-05 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Processes for the preparation of (r)-2-(7-(4-cyclopentyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydrocyclopenta[b]indol-3-yl)acetic acid and salts thereof
US9085581B2 (en) 2010-03-03 2015-07-21 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Processes for the preparation of S1P1 receptor modulators and crystalline forms thereof
US8835470B2 (en) 2010-04-23 2014-09-16 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Mandelamide heterocyclic compounds
TW201643169A (en) * 2010-07-09 2016-12-16 艾伯維股份有限公司 Spiro-piperidine derivatives as S1P modulators
TW201206893A (en) 2010-07-09 2012-02-16 Abbott Healthcare Products Bv Bisaryl (thio) morpholine derivatives as S1P modulators
TWI522361B (en) 2010-07-09 2016-02-21 艾伯維公司 Fused heterocyclic derivatives as s1p modulators
US9187437B2 (en) 2010-09-24 2015-11-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Substituted oxadiazole compounds
AR085749A1 (en) 2011-04-01 2013-10-23 Novartis Ag FORMULATIONS
UY35338A (en) * 2013-02-21 2014-08-29 Bristol Myers Squibb Company Una Corporación Del Estado De Delaware BICYCLIC COMPOUNDS MODULATING THE ACTIVITY OF S1P1 AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
US10077236B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2018-09-18 The Regents Of The University Of California Azacyclic constrained analogs of FTY720
TW201613864A (en) 2014-02-20 2016-04-16 Takeda Pharmaceutical Novel compounds
UY36274A (en) 2014-08-20 2016-02-29 Bristol Myers Squibb Company Una Corporación Del Estado De Delaware BICYCLIC COMPOUNDS REPLACED AS SELECTIVE AGONISTS OF S1P1 RECEPTOR ACTIVITY COUPLED TO PROTEIN G
EP3242666A1 (en) 2015-01-06 2017-11-15 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating conditions related to the s1p1 receptor
CN108349891B (en) 2015-06-22 2022-04-05 艾尼纳制药公司 Crystalline L-arginine salt of a compound for use in S1P1 receptor-related disorders
CN108366990B (en) * 2015-09-24 2021-09-03 加利福尼亚大学董事会 Synthetic sphingolipid molecules, drugs, methods of their synthesis and methods of treatment
KR102482825B1 (en) * 2016-09-02 2022-12-29 브리스톨-마이어스 스큅 컴퍼니 Substituted tricyclic heterocyclic compounds
US11534424B2 (en) 2017-02-16 2022-12-27 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of primary biliary cholangitis
MX2019009843A (en) 2017-02-16 2020-01-30 Arena Pharm Inc Compounds and methods for treatment of inflammatory bowel disease with extra-intestinal manifestations.
KR101891051B1 (en) * 2018-01-29 2018-08-31 주식회사 세종바이오메드 Sphingosine-1-Phosphate analogue and synthetic method thereof
KR20210074291A (en) 2018-09-06 2021-06-21 아레나 파마슈티칼스, 인크. Compounds useful for the treatment of autoimmune and inflammatory disorders
WO2020113094A1 (en) 2018-11-30 2020-06-04 Nuvation Bio Inc. Pyrrole and pyrazole compounds and methods of use thereof
CN110808093A (en) * 2019-09-16 2020-02-18 中山大学孙逸仙纪念医院 Prediction model for clinical prognosis of radioactive encephalopathy and construction method thereof
IL292547A (en) 2019-10-31 2022-06-01 Escape Bio Inc Solid forms of an s1p-receptor modulator
CN117007818B (en) * 2023-08-04 2024-04-09 徐州医科大学科技园发展有限公司 Application of S1PR1 as target in developing or preparing medicine for preventing chronic pain related memory injury diseases

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1993007111A1 (en) * 1991-10-02 1993-04-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Cyclopentane and cyclopentene derivatives with antiallergic antiinflammatory and tumor necrosis factor inhibiting activity
WO2006088944A1 (en) * 2005-02-14 2006-08-24 University Of Virginia Patent Foundation Sphingosine 1- phos phate agonists comprising cycloalkanes and 5 -membered heterocycles substituted by amino and phenyl groups
WO2007098474A1 (en) * 2006-02-21 2007-08-30 University Of Virginia Patent Foundation Phenyl-cycloalkyl and phenyl-heterocyclic derivatives as s1p receptor agonists

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5314896A (en) * 1991-11-20 1994-05-24 Warner-Lambert Company 1,3-substituted cycloalkenes and cycloalkanes as central nervous system agents

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1993007111A1 (en) * 1991-10-02 1993-04-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Cyclopentane and cyclopentene derivatives with antiallergic antiinflammatory and tumor necrosis factor inhibiting activity
WO2006088944A1 (en) * 2005-02-14 2006-08-24 University Of Virginia Patent Foundation Sphingosine 1- phos phate agonists comprising cycloalkanes and 5 -membered heterocycles substituted by amino and phenyl groups
WO2007098474A1 (en) * 2006-02-21 2007-08-30 University Of Virginia Patent Foundation Phenyl-cycloalkyl and phenyl-heterocyclic derivatives as s1p receptor agonists

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of WO2008079382A1 *
Y. OTOMARU ET. AL.: "Preparation of C2-Symmetric Bicyclo[2.2.2]octa-2,5-diene Ligands and their Use for Rhodium Catalyzed Asymmetric 1,4-Addition of Arylboronic Acids.", JOURNAL OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, vol. 70, 24 February 2005 (2005-02-24), pages 2503-2508, XP002628711, *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2008079382A1 (en) 2008-07-03
RU2009128062A (en) 2011-01-27
MX2009006751A (en) 2009-06-30
CA2672727A1 (en) 2008-07-03
CO6180436A2 (en) 2010-07-19
NO20092376L (en) 2009-06-22
EP2120575A4 (en) 2011-04-27
CL2007003784A1 (en) 2008-06-27
CR10872A (en) 2009-07-23
JP2010513532A (en) 2010-04-30
KR20090095659A (en) 2009-09-09
AU2007338700A1 (en) 2008-07-03
BRPI0720478A2 (en) 2014-01-14
DOP2009000149A (en) 2010-05-15
PE20081561A1 (en) 2008-10-30
TW200838497A (en) 2008-10-01
AR064650A1 (en) 2009-04-15
UY30829A1 (en) 2008-07-31
ECSP099435A (en) 2009-07-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2120575A1 (en) Sphingosine-1 -phosphate receptor agonist and antagonist compounds
US8217027B2 (en) Sphingosine-1-phosphate receptor agonist and antagonist compounds
US7834039B2 (en) Oxadiazole compounds
AU2010213794A1 (en) Agonists and antagonists of the S1P5 receptor, and methods of uses thereof
US7790741B2 (en) Imidazothiazoles and imidazoxazoles
US20110207704A1 (en) Novel Oxadiazole Compounds
EP2509424A1 (en) Novel oxadiazole compounds
US20130072470A1 (en) Novel tricyclic compounds
US20120330012A1 (en) Novel Tricyclic Compounds
WO2011156698A2 (en) NOVEL PYRAZOLO[3,4-d]PYRIMIDINE COMPOUNDS
EP3031324A2 (en) Tricyclic kinase inhibitors
US20120238549A1 (en) Nuclear Hormone Receptor Modulators
US20080249305A1 (en) Novel imidazole based heterocycles
US20080242862A1 (en) Novel imidazo based heterocycles
CN101610674A (en) Sphingosine-1-phosphate ester receptor stimulating agent and agonist compounds
WO2008118485A1 (en) Novel imidazo based heterocycles
WO2014169473A1 (en) 6H-IMIDAZO[1,5-a]PYRROLO[2,3-e]PYRAZINE COMPOUNDS

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20090622

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MT NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR

AX Request for extension of the european patent

Extension state: BA HR MK RS

RAX Requested extension states of the european patent have changed

Extension state: RS

Payment date: 20090622

Extension state: MK

Payment date: 20090622

Extension state: HR

Payment date: 20090622

Extension state: BA

Payment date: 20090622

A4 Supplementary search report drawn up and despatched

Effective date: 20110330

RIC1 Information provided on ipc code assigned before grant

Ipc: A61P 25/28 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07F 9/6553 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07F 9/655 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07F 9/653 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07F 9/40 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07F 9/30 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07F 9/38 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 413/04 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 333/16 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 307/24 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 307/22 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 271/06 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 263/52 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 263/32 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 213/30 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 207/14 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 207/12 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07D 205/04 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07C 229/48 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07C 229/14 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07C 217/74 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07C 215/42 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: C07C 215/38 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: A61K 31/415 20060101ALI20110321BHEP

Ipc: A01N 43/50 20060101AFI20080716BHEP

17Q First examination report despatched

Effective date: 20120912

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION IS DEEMED TO BE WITHDRAWN

18D Application deemed to be withdrawn

Effective date: 20130123